JP2016007440A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide game performance which notifies a player that a special combination is internally won and can enhance interest of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine has: input operation detection means for detecting input operation; game time determination means which determines a game time of privilege imparting game when the special combination wins an internal winning combination; operation frequency determination means which determines operation frequency of the input operation for completing the privilege imparting game before a game time passes; release operation completion determination means which determines whether detection frequency of the input operation reaches operation frequency and the release operation is completed before a game time has passed from when a special combination is detected; and performance state transition means which transits a performance state to an assist state in which advantageous operation information about imparting of game media when it is determined that the release operation is completed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each peripheral surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “game medium”) are inserted and a start lever is operated by a player. , A start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels, and detection of a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels being pressed by the player, and rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of the motor, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and that transmits each driving force to each reel, and a signal output by the start switch and the stop switch. And a reel control unit that controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the rotation of the stepping motor and stops and stops each reel. Is detected based on a random number, and the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that stops the rotation of the machine.

  This type of gaming machine is configured such that a game medium is paid out to a player by aligning symbols corresponding to an internal winning combination by a reel rotation stop operation. In particular, by shifting the game state to a bonus game (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) which is a game state advantageous to the player by arranging specific symbols, the player can further increase the number of game media. It is possible to receive a payout.

  In addition, by arranging specific symbols, a game that increases the internal winning probability of a replay that can be played without inserting a new game medium is started (this game period is set to “High RT ”), and when a small role that corresponds to high RT and a payout of a predetermined number of game media is won internally, the player is notified of the pushing order of the reels (referred to as assist time (AT)). Thus, it is possible to perform a game effect that facilitates winning of a small role (this effect state is referred to as an ART state).

  In this way, when the game state is internally won to a special winning combination that becomes an opportunity to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player, or when a special winning combination that becomes an opportunity to shift to the ART state is internally won In addition, the reel is kept non-rotating continuously for a certain period of time, or the reel is rotated in an unstable state, and a special winning combination (special role) is given to the player by using a liquid crystal display device or the like during that time. There is known a gaming machine that notifies that the player has won the inside (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, generally, even if a game operation (input operation) is performed while a notification effect process is being performed by a liquid crystal display device or the like, the next game unit cannot be started (this state) Is called a locked state). By maintaining the locked state for a certain period of time in this way, the player will naturally pay attention to the notification content, and it is possible to make the player recognize the winning result of the internal winning combination by the notification effect processing. .

JP 2004-290703 A

  However, in the gaming machine having the configuration in which the locked state is maintained for a certain time as described above, even if the player wants to start the next unit game while the locked state is maintained, the gaming operation (input operation) The game could not be started because is disabled. For this reason, a player who has already seen the notification contents by the notification effect process (has experienced the notification effect process) may feel bored until the locked state is released, There was a risk of lowering.

  In order to prevent such a decrease in interest by a player, a gaming machine that releases (cancels) a notification effect process and a locked state by performing a predetermined game operation or the like is also known. However, in gaming machines capable of releasing the notification effect process and the locked state, the player has a strong tendency to perform the release process in an attempt to start the next unit game as soon as possible. For this reason, as a result, the original role of notifying about the internal winning combination is lost, and there is a problem that it is impossible to sufficiently notify.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is possible to reliably notify a player that a special winning combination (special combination) has been won internally, as well as processing related to this notification. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player by starting.

  In order to solve the above-described problems, a gaming machine (pachislot machine 1) according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are arranged and the reels arranged on the plurality of reels, respectively. Symbol display means (reel display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols, start operation detection means (start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by the player, and detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (main CPU 93) for changing the plurality of symbols by rotating the plurality of reels based on An internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stop for stopping the rotation of each reel provided corresponding to the plurality of reels. Based on stop operation detecting means (stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R) for detecting an operation, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of each reel, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Accordingly, a winning determination means (main CPU 93) for determining whether or not a winning combination is based on a combination of symbols stopped on an active line (winning line) provided in the symbol display means, and the player An input operation detecting means (BET switch 77) for detecting an input operation and a special combination for starting a privilege granting game are internally provided. When determined as a winning combination, a game time determining means (main CPU 93) for determining the game time of the privilege-giving game, and when the special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, determined by the game time determining means The number-of-inputs determining means (main CPU 93) for determining the number of times of the input operation necessary for ending the privilege-giving game before the played game time elapses, and the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination The release operation is completed when the number of input operations detected by the input operation detection means reaches the number of operations determined by the operation number determination means between the time when the game time has elapsed and the game time has elapsed. Then, a release operation completion judging means (main CPU 93, sub CPU 102) for judging whether or not the privilege granting game is finished. When the release operation completion determining means determines that the release operation has been completed before the game time has elapsed, the effect state is brought to an assist state in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified. And the stop operation detecting means when the game time elapses from when the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination or when the release operation is performed. The stop operation is not detected until the earlier time when the release operation is determined to be completed by the completion determination means.

  Here, the effect state means an effect state such as a display process of the liquid crystal display device controlled by the sub-control circuit, an acoustic output process output from the speaker, and a lighting-off process of lighting equipment such as an LED. Yes. The assist state in which information on advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified is that the stop button pressing order is notified to the liquid crystal display device or the like, or the speaker is notified by voice output, and the player By pressing the stop button in the notified pressing order, it means an effect state that makes it easy to win a specific winning combination. The game state transition process between the assist state in which the push order notification is performed and the state in which the push order notification is not performed is generally performed by an effect state transition unit based on a sub-control circuit or the like.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the special combination for starting the privilege granting game is determined as the internal winning combination, the game time of the privilege granting game is determined and the privilege granting game is executed before the game time elapses. By determining the number of input operations required to be completed, and when the number of input operations detected by the input operation detection means reaches the number of operations between the time the special role is detected and the game time elapses. Then, it is determined whether or not the release operation is completed and the privilege giving game is ended.

  For this reason, the player can know that the special combination has been won internally by starting the privilege granting game, and can reliably notify the player that the special combination has been won internally.

  In particular, since the bonus grant game is started by the internal winning of the special role, the player who is looking forward to the bonus grant game is enhanced the attention and interest in the internal bonus of the special role and its notification effect. For this reason, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree and recognition degree with respect to the internal winning of a special role more via a privilege provision game.

  Furthermore, in the privilege grant game, by performing a predetermined input operation in a short time, the release operation can be completed earlier than the game time and the privilege grant game can be ended. For this reason, as a result, it is possible to shorten the time for notification of the special role and to shorten the time until the next game is started. It can be prevented that the player becomes bored and the interest of the game is reduced.

  In addition, since the game time and the number of operations are determined for each privilege-giving game, the number of input operations and the time required for completing the release operation are also different for each privilege-giving game. For this reason, every time a privilege-giving game is started, it is necessary to perform a predetermined number of input operations within a different game time. Otherwise, the release operation may not be completed. Therefore, the player who intends to complete the release operation seriously works on the input operation in the privilege granting game, and can further enhance the player's interest in the privilege granting game.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the release operation completion determination unit determines that the release operation has been completed, the effect state is shifted to an assist state in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified. Processing is performed. Since the player has a strong tendency to desire to be notified of advantageous stop operation information related to the provision of the game medium, the player will eagerly work on the game to complete the release operation earlier in the privilege grant game. It becomes possible to enhance the interest of. Further, by experiencing a lot of privilege granting games, it is possible to learn the tips of the release operation and improve the speed of the release operation, so that interest and motivation for the release operation can be improved.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, either when the game time has elapsed since the special combination was detected as an internal winning combination, or when the cancellation operation was determined to be completed by the cancellation operation completion determination means Until early, the stop operation detection means does not detect the stop operation. As described above, when the special combination is won internally, even if the stop operation is performed, the stop operation is not accepted, so the player may determine that a privilege grant game different from the normal game has started. It is possible to reliably inform the player that the player has won a special role internally.

  Further, when the stop operation is not detected by the stop operation detecting means, the game operation (stop operation) other than the input operation that can be detected by the input operation detecting means is not accepted, so-called locked state (Or a state similar to the locked state). In such a case, the player concentrates on the input operation in order to release the locked state as soon as possible, so that the player's interest in the input operation can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the locked state can be released by completing the release operation, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction in the privilege grant game.

  Further, the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1) according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are arranged, and a part of the plurality of symbols respectively arranged on the plurality of reels. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means and the start operation detecting means (start switch 79) for detecting the start operation by the player. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means by the symbol change means (main CPU 93) for changing the plurality of symbols by rotating the reels respectively, the internal winning combination is obtained from a plurality of roles with a predetermined probability. Based on the depression of a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, an internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) for determining a combination and the symbol changing means A stop operation detecting means (stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R) for detecting a stop operation for stopping the reel that has been further rotated, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of each reel based on the timing when the stop operation is detected, and the reel A winning determination means (main CPU 93) for determining whether or not a winning combination is based on a combination of symbols stopped on an active line provided in the symbol display means when the change of the symbols is stopped by the stop control means. ) And input operation detecting means (stops) for detecting the player's input operation by the plurality of stop buttons. 80L, 80C, 80R), and a game time determining means (main CPU 93) for determining a game time of the privilege granting game when a special role for starting the privilege granting game is determined as an internal winning combination. When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the plurality of stop buttons necessary for ending the privilege granting game before the game time determined by the game time determination means elapses. An operation order determining means (main CPU 93) for determining an operation order of input operations from a plurality of operation orders by the plurality of stop buttons, and the game time from when the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination. Until the time elapses, the input operation detection order in the input operation detection means is determined by the operation order determination means. A release operation completion determining means (main CPU 93, sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not the privilege-giving game has been completed by the completion of the release operation, and the release operation completion determining means. Thus, when it is determined that the release operation has been completed before the game time elapses, effect state transition means for transitioning the effect state to an assist state in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified (The sub CPU 102), and the stop operation detection unit is configured to release the release operation when the game time has elapsed from when the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination, or by the release operation completion determination unit. The stop operation is not detected until the earlier time when it is determined that the process is completed.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the operation order of the input operations by the plurality of stop buttons necessary for ending the privilege-giving game before the game time elapses is determined from the plurality of operation orders, and the special role is internally In the period from when the winning combination is determined until the game time elapses, the determination of whether or not the release operation has been completed is made by matching the detection sequence of the input operations in the input operation detecting means with the determined operation sequence. Do.

  In this way, judging the completion of the release operation based on the operation order of the stop button or the like to be operated makes the release operation method diverse and requires attention to the release operation. Therefore, the player's interest in the release operation Can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the operation order of the stop buttons can be changed according to the determined game time, etc., it becomes possible to increase or decrease the difficulty level of the release operation or change the operation speed of the release operation. . For this reason, it becomes possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the release operation, and to prevent the player from getting bored (feeling bored) by repeatedly experiencing the privilege-giving game. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the gaming machine described above, the effect state transition means further increases the number of games in which the assist state is continued when the release operation completion determination means determines that the release operation has been completed. It may be what performs.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when it is determined that the release operation is completed by the release operation completion determination means, it is possible to further perform processing for increasing the number of games in which the assist state is continued.

  In this way, by increasing the number of games in the assist state, an optimal privilege is given to the player, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the privilege grant game regardless of the game state Become.

  Further, the effect state transition means described above may subtract a time required for the release operation to be completed from the game time, and determine the number of games to be increased according to the subtraction result.

  According to the above-described gaming machine, the earlier the release operation is completed, the more times the game enters the assist state, so the player is eager to complete the release operation earlier to complete the release operation. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. Also, by experiencing a lot of privilege-giving games, you can learn the tips of the release operation and improve the speed of the release operation, so you can improve your interest and motivation for the release operation. . Furthermore, since the number of games in the assist state increases as a result of the completion of the release operation, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction and challenge.

  In addition, the symbol variation means described above, when the start operation is detected and the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination, when the game time has elapsed since the special combination was detected, Alternatively, on the basis of the earlier time when the release operation is determined to be completed by the release operation completion determination means, the reel stop control means starts a reel rotation operation for stopping the symbol variation. You may do.

  As described above, when the start operation is detected and the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination, when the game time elapses from when the special combination is detected, or the release operation is performed. While the bonus giving game described above is being performed by starting the reel rotation operation for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol by the reel stop control means, based on the earlier time when it is determined to be completed. In addition, a reel rotation start operation based on a start operation, a reel rotation stop operation based on a stop operation, a winning determination operation based on a combination of symbols, and a game medium payout operation based on a win, which are common gaming machine games, are performed. It can be prevented from being broken. For this reason, when the privilege grant game is started, the player can concentrate on the input operation in order to complete the release operation, and can enhance the interest in the privilege grant game.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the special combination for starting the privilege granting game is determined as the internal winning combination, the game time of the privilege granting game is determined and the privilege granting game is executed before the game time elapses. By determining the number of input operations required to be completed, and when the number of input operations detected by the input operation detection means reaches the number of operations between the time the special role is detected and the game time elapses. Then, it is determined whether or not the release operation is completed and the privilege giving game is ended.

  For this reason, the player can know that the special combination has been won internally by starting the privilege granting game, and can reliably notify the player that the special combination has been won internally.

  In particular, since the bonus grant game is started by the internal winning of the special role, the player who is looking forward to the bonus grant game is enhanced the attention and interest in the internal bonus of the special role and its notification effect. For this reason, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree and recognition degree with respect to the internal winning of a special role more via a privilege provision game.

  Furthermore, in the privilege grant game, by performing a predetermined input operation in a short time, the release operation can be completed earlier than the game time and the privilege grant game can be ended. For this reason, as a result, it is possible to shorten the time for notification of the special role and to shorten the time until the next game is started. It can be prevented that the player becomes bored and the interest of the game is reduced.

  In addition, since the game time and the number of operations are determined for each privilege-giving game, the number of input operations and the time required for completing the release operation are also different for each privilege-giving game. For this reason, every time a privilege-giving game is started, it is necessary to perform a predetermined number of input operations within a different game time. Otherwise, the release operation may not be completed. Therefore, the player who intends to complete the release operation seriously works on the input operation in the privilege granting game, and can further enhance the player's interest in the privilege granting game.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the release operation completion determination unit determines that the release operation has been completed, the effect state is shifted to an assist state in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified. Processing is performed. Since the player has a strong tendency to desire to be notified of advantageous stop operation information related to the provision of the game medium, the player will eagerly work on the game to complete the release operation earlier in the privilege grant game. It becomes possible to enhance the interest of. In addition, by experiencing a lot of privilege granting games, it is possible to learn the tips (points) of the release operation and improve the speed of the release operation, so that interest and motivation for the release operation can be improved.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, either when the game time has elapsed since the special combination was detected as an internal winning combination, or when the cancellation operation was determined to be completed by the cancellation operation completion determination means Until early, the stop operation detection means does not detect the stop operation. As described above, when the special combination is won internally, even if the stop operation is performed, the stop operation is not accepted, so the player may determine that a privilege grant game different from the normal game has started. It is possible to reliably inform the player that the player has won a special role internally.

  Further, when the stop operation is not detected by the stop operation detecting means, the game operation (stop operation) other than the input operation that can be detected by the input operation detecting means is not accepted, so-called locked state (Or a state similar to the locked state). In such a case, the player concentrates on the input operation in order to release the locked state as soon as possible, so that the player's interest in the input operation can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the locked state can be released by completing the release operation, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction in the privilege grant game.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 1 is an overall perspective view showing an external structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the state where the middle door of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention was closed. It is a perspective view of the state where the middle door of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention was opened. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the cabinet of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the back surface side of the front door of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub control circuit of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for a small combination and replay memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for bonus memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and winning combination in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and winning combination in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and winning combination in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and winning combination in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general game states memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming states memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the priority order table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the priority order table for MB gaming states memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the reel stop initial setting table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order table selection table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the cancellation | release counter lottery table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storing area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order data storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of each sub-control information which the sub-control circuit of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention controls. It is a normal mode reference table lottery table at the time of setting change memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a normal mode reference table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A), (b) is an AT end normal mode reference table lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is an AT end normal mode reference table lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(d) is the highly reliable transfer game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is the highly reliable transfer game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is the highly reliable transfer game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is the highly reliable transfer game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a pseudo bonus reference table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(d) are the normal time pseudo | simulation bonus lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(f) is the pseudo | simulation bonus promotion lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(f) is the pseudo | simulation bonus promotion lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(e) are pseudo | simulation bonus finalization screen effect navigation lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(e) are pseudo | simulation bonus finalization screen effect navigation lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an ART reference table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is an ART lottery table during pseudo bonus winning stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is the ART navigation lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the special table lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a special mode table reference table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A), (b) is the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st AT state start special mode transfer lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is an ART lottery table during the AT state pseudo bonus winning stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is an ART lottery table during the AT state pseudo bonus winning stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(g) is the ART loop lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the special continuation special mode transition lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an ART lottery table when special conditions are stored, which is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an ART lottery table at the time of execution of a pseudo bonus added state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is a normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is a normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is a normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is a normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 1st AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A), (b) is a lottery table for adding the first AT state game number stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st pseudo | simulation bonus selection production | presentation timing lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is the 1st pseudo | simulation bonus selection production | presentation timing lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is the 2nd pseudo | simulation bonus selection stage announcement timing lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is the 2nd pseudo | simulation bonus selection stage announcement timing lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an end effect lottery table at the time of execution of the third pseudo bonus selection effect stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the effect game state in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 114. FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 114. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reel production lottery process performed in the internal lottery process shown in FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel stop initial setting process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 114. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game start time effect control process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 114. FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority storage process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 114 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 125. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing priority order table selection process performed in the drawing priority order storage process shown in FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a symbol code storing process executed in the drawing priority order storing process shown in FIG. 122 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 125; FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 114. FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a priority pull-in control process executed in the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 125. FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing bonus end check processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 114. FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing bonus operation check processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 114. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process by control of the main CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the input port check process performed in the interruption process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main task started in the mother task shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task started in the mother task shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the main board | substrate communication task shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task started in the mother task shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process performed in the command analysis process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception performed in the production content determination process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reel effect process performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a normal penalty generation process executed in the normal middle process shown in FIGS. 142 and 143 and the pseudo bonus transition state penalty process shown in FIG. 149; 142, FIG. 143 normal normal processing, FIG. 146 early warning processing, FIGS. 150, 151 pseudo bonus middle processing, FIGS. 152, 153 pseudo bonus end processing, FIG. 155, the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIG. 155, the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. 17 is a flowchart showing common processing after ART lottery executed in the second AT state end processing shown and the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state processing shown in FIG. 164; FIG. 142 shows normal processing shown in FIG. 142 and FIG. 143, pre-indication processing executed in the first AT state processing shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157 and the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. It is a flowchart. In the normal processing shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the precursor processing shown in FIG. 146, the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, and the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. It is a flowchart which shows the state transfer common process at the time of the completion of the precursor. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation bonus transfer state process performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus transition state penalty process executed in the pseudo bonus transition state process shown in FIG. 148. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during pseudo | simulation bonus performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during pseudo | simulation bonus performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus end process executed in the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 150 and 151. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus end process executed in the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 150 and 151. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing first AT state start pre-processing executed in the pseudo bonus end time processing shown in FIGS. 152 and 153; 154 is a flowchart showing first AT state start pre-processing executed in the pseudo bonus end time processing shown in FIGS. 152 and 153; It is a flowchart which shows the process in 1st AT state performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in 1st AT state performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in 2nd AT state performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in 2nd AT state performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in 2nd AT state performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing a second AT state initial process executed in the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 158 to 160. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a second AT state end time process which is executed in the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 158 to 160. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a common process at the end of ART, which is executed in the second AT state end process shown in FIG. 162; It is a flowchart which shows the process during pseudo | simulation bonus promotion gaming state performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the common process at the time of the game start performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the winning operation command reception performed in the production content determination process shown in FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing a normal penalty winning time process executed in the winning action command receiving time process shown in FIG. 166; 167 is a flowchart showing penalty winning time processing executed in the normal penalty winning time processing shown in FIG. 167 and the pseudo bonus transition state winning time processing shown in FIG. 169. 175 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus transition state winning-time process executed in the winning action command receiving process shown in FIG. 166. 175 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state winning process executed in the winning operation command receiving process shown in FIG. 166. It is a flowchart which shows the electric power interruption generation | occurrence | production process performed with a sub control circuit when the main power supply of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is turned off. It is a front view which shows the special mode suggestion effect which the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention performs in the 1st AT state. It is a front view which shows the special mode alerting | reporting effect which the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention performs in the 2nd AT state. It is the character combination table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game information provision system which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the game information in the two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 176 of the game information provision system which concerns on embodiment of this invention.

  A pachislot machine which is an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Function flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachislot machine 1, when a medal as a game medium is inserted by the player and the start lever 23 is operated, a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). One value (hereinafter, random value) is extracted from.

  An internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means is based on the detection of the unit game start operation on the start lever 23 by the start switch 79 (see FIG. 7) (establishment of a predetermined start condition) with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Determine the internal winning role.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols (display combination) that permits display along a winning line as an effective line, which will be described later, is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called “losing” Such a thing is provided.

  Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93 to be described later) And the timing at which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed are controlled to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols (frames)”, and the maximum number is equal to four symbols (maximum The number of sliding pieces).

  However, in MB (a continuous action device for type 2 special feature) gaming state, the corresponding reel is within a predetermined time of 75 ms from when at least one of the stop buttons is pressed. Control to stop the rotation of is performed.

  The reel stop control means displays the symbol combination as much as possible along the winning line using the specified time when an internal winning combination permitting display of the symbol combination related to winning is determined. Thus, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the range of maximum number of sliding symbols is used so that they are not displayed along the winning line using the specified time. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R is all stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 to be described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line relates to winning. Determine whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether the winning combination is established or not based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line, based on the fact that the change of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player.

  A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first. The stop operation performed after the stop operation and the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, in the series of flows described above, video display performed by a display device such as the liquid crystal display device 11, light output performed by various lamps (LEDs 82 and 85 described later), speakers 42, 58, Various effects are performed using outputs of sound (sound effects, BGM, etc.) performed by 64, 65L, and 65R, or combinations thereof.

  When the player operates the start lever 23, in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination, other lottery processing and a random number value for production (hereinafter referred to as a random number value for production) are extracted. Is done.

  When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means (sub CPU 102 described later) determines by lottery what is to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the production contents are determined, the production execution means determines whether or not there is a prize when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started and when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped. The execution of the production is advanced in conjunction with each opportunity such as when it is broken.

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 provides the player with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination, that is, the combination of symbols to be aimed, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. Thus, the player's interest in the game is improved.

[Pachislot structure]
The functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 has been described above. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<External structure of pachislot>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 is a gaming machine that uses a game medium such as a coin or a medal, a game ball, a token, or the like, or a game medium such as a card that stores information on a game value assigned to a player. However, in the following description, medals are used.

  The exterior body 2 of the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a cabinet 2a that houses reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a. The handle 7 is a concave portion to be put on when carrying the pachislot machine 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 forms the upper part of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. The liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed on the lower side of the upper panel unit 10 and executes, for example, an effect by displaying an image as an effect display by an image. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays three variable symbols as decorative symbols displayed side by side on the liquid crystal display device 11 in conjunction with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal unit 12 is provided with a symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The symbol display area 4 is arranged on the front side superimposed on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration capable of transmitting through the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 stop rotating, the reel display window 4 displays a reel display among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each of the upper, middle and lower regions within the frame of the window 4. That is, the reel display window 4 displays a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel display window 4 in the present embodiment constitutes symbol display means.

  In the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 is formed by combining any one of predetermined areas among the three regions including the upper, middle, and lower stages facing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R of the reel display window 4. A pseudo line is defined as a line (winning line) that is a target for determining whether or not a prize has been won.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the pedestal portion 12. The frame member 13 has a reel display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button attachment portion 15.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously below the reel display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are covered with a transparent window cover 16.

  The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b. In addition, the frame member 13 includes a sheet placement portion 17 that faces the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. And between the sheet | seat mounting part 17 and the window cover 16, the sheet | seat member (information sheet) in which the information regarding a game was described is arrange | positioned. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without unevenness or gaps.

  Since the window cover 16 constituting the information sheet arrangement portion is a non-removable front surface of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface with no irregularities or gaps, the information sheet arrangement portion is used to make a pachislot machine. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the inside of 1. The exchange of information sheets will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the information display window 14 is formed as one opening that is continuous with the reel display window 4. However, the information display window 14 may be provided below the reel display window 4. It may not be continuous. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 may be formed as two openings arranged in the vertical direction.

  The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is formed on a plane facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R pass. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are associated with the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  The stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are one of various devices that are to be operated by the player. Other various devices that are to be operated by the player include a medal slot 21, a BET button 22a, A MAXBET button 22b and a start lever 23 are provided.

  The medal slot 21 is provided to accept a medal dropped from the outside by the player. The medals accepted by the medal slot 21 are inserted into one game with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the specified number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function).

  The BET button 22a and the MAXBET button 22b are provided for determining the number of coins to be inserted into one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. When the BET button 22a is pressed once, it is determined that one medal is inserted from the medals stored in the pachislot machine 1, and when the MAXBET button 22b is pressed once, three It is determined that a medal has been inserted. The start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Further, a 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 24 provides information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Is digitally displayed. A selection button 28 and a determination button 29 are provided above the 7-segment display 24. The player can input to the menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 using the selection button 28 and the determination button 29.

  Side panel units 26 </ b> L and 26 </ b> R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12. Each of the side panel units 26L and 26R has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided to pull out medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  A lower panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12. The waist panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating from the back side of the decorative panel.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 51 (hereinafter also referred to as a hopper device 51) described later to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32 are stored in the medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

<Internal structure of pachislot>
3 and 4 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a state where the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 4 shows a state where the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

  FIG. 5 is a front view showing the inside of the cabinet 2a. FIG. 6 is a front view showing the back side of the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a includes a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 5). A cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed on the upper side inside the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is attached to the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via attachment brackets 43L and 43R. The cabinet side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting sound effects.

  A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a medal payout count. It relays the wiring connecting the switch (not shown) and the external concentration terminal board 47.

  An external concentrated terminal plate 47 is disposed on the right side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub power supply device 48 is disposed on the left side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply device 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply device 48 supplies power with an AC voltage of 100 V to the power supply device 53 described later. Further, the power of the AC voltage 100V is converted into the power of the DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 45.

  A hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed below the inside of the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 20b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can store a large amount of medals and can discharge them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout port 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate 20b.

  The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 20c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  A power switch 53a (see FIG. 7), a setting key insertion slot (setting change switch 53b, see FIG. 7), an automatic settlement switch 53c (see FIG. 7), and a stop switch 53d (see FIG. 7) 7) and a setting change button (reset button) 53e. A transparent acrylic door 53g that can be opened and closed is provided on the front side of the various switches etc. (53a to 53e). By opening the transparent acrylic door 53g, various switches etc. (53a to 53e) can be operated. It has become. Further, a power supply board 53f (see FIG. 7) for detecting settings of various switches and the like is provided inside the power supply device 53.

  As shown in FIGS. 3, 4 and 6, the middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and is configured to open and close the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) from the back side. Door stoppers 41a, 41b, and 41c are provided at the upper and lower portions of the middle door 41. The door stoppers 41a, 41b and 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 in a state where the reel display window 4 is closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c to release the middle door 41 from being fixed.

  A main control board case 55 that houses a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) and three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the middle door 41. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the pachislot machine 1, when the middle door 41 is opened, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placing portion 17 are exposed.

  As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17, an information sheet on which information related to the game is described is arranged. The information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened and the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. Also, in the pachislot machine 1, when exchanging information sheets, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

  The main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. The setting key switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1 or confirming the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

  A main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) housed in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a main game in the pachislot machine 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, determination of presence / absence of winning, transition of a main game state (game state) described later. A circuit for controlling the flow. That is, the main control circuit 91 controls the gaming state related to the progress of the game.

  Specifically, the main control circuit 91 includes a main CPU 93 (see FIG. 8) that executes each control as described above. The main CPU 93 detects a start operation by the start switch 79, and a plurality of which will be described later. The internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from among the roles. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

  Further, the main CPU 93 controls the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the detection of the start operation by the start switch 79 to rotate the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, thereby rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The symbol displayed on 3R is changed. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes symbol variation means.

  Further, the main CPU 93 detects a stop operation by the internal winning combination determined as described above and stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R (left stop switch 80L, middle stop switch 80C, right stop switch 80R) described later. Based on the timing, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, thereby stopping the variation of the symbols displayed on the reel display window 4. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes a reel stop control means and an input operation detection means.

  Further, the main CPU 93 receives the winning or non-winning of the combination based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line provided on the reel display window 4 when the variation of each symbol is stopped as described above. Determine. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes a winning determination means.

  Further, the main CPU 93 has a general gaming state (RT0 gaming state) as a normal state where the probability that a replay related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and a probability that a replay is determined as an internal winning combination is a general gaming state. Control of the transition of the main gaming state between the RT1 gaming state as a higher high RT gaming state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 constitute a main control board unit. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  A sub control board case 57 that houses the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7) is disposed above the middle door 41. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 constitutes the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying images. That is, the sub-control circuit 101 controls the effect state related to the game. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later. In the following description, the effect state is also referred to as a secondary game state.

  A center speaker 58 is disposed above the sub control board case 57. A fan 59 is disposed on the left side of the center speaker 58 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. That is, the fan 59 is disposed at the upper part on the back side of the front door 2b. The fan 59 blows air downward to cool the interior of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub relay board 61 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 57 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, it is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the board disposed around the sub-control board 72. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board | substrate 72, LED board 62A, 62B mentioned later is mentioned.

  The LED boards 62A and 62B are disposed above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2b. The LED boards 62A and 62B display a blinking pattern by causing an LED 85 (see FIG. 7) showing a specific example of the light source to emit light according to an effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). .

  In the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a plurality of LED boards in addition to the LED boards 62A and 62B.

  Below the sub-relay board 61, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 is disposed. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores the opening / closing history of the middle door 41. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

  Below the middle door 41, a board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged. The board speaker 64 faces the waist panel unit 31 (see FIG. 2). The lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

  A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are disposed above the lower speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides an appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (not shown) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2b. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  Further, a door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed below the reel display window 4 and in an area opened and closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 4). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 7), a selector 66, and a game operation display board 81 ( FIG. 7) is a substrate that relays the wiring.

  Here, examples of the various buttons and switches include a BET button 22a, a MAXBET button 22b, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 (described later), a start switch 79 (described later), and the like. .

[Control system for pachislot machines]
Next, a control system provided in the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot machine 1.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 disposed on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 disposed on the front door 2b.

  The main control board 71 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, an external concentration terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power supply board 53f of the power supply 53. , Is connected. The external concentration terminal board 47, the hopper device 51 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44. Here, since the external concentration terminal board 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, description thereof will be omitted.

  The reel relay terminal board 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 penetrates a later-described switch through hole of the medal auxiliary storage 52. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  A power switch 53a, a setting change switch (setting key insertion port) 53b, an automatic settlement switch 53c, a stop switch 53d, and a setting change button 53e are connected to the power supply board 53f of the power supply device 53. The power switch 53a is set to ON when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The setting change switch 53b is used at the time of changing a setting value for setting the internal winning probability of the pachislot machine 1 (in the pachislot machine 1 according to the embodiment, setting can be made in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”). Switch. The setting change switch 53b can be turned on by inserting a setting key into a setting key insertion port provided in the power supply device 53 and rotating it 90 degrees clockwise. Can be turned off.

  When changing the setting value, the setting key is rotated 90 degrees to turn on the setting change switch 53b, the power switch 53a is turned on, and the setting change button 53e is pressed to change the setting value to "1". ”To“ 6 ”. Then, after determining the set value selected by operating the start lever 23, the setting key is returned to its original state and the setting change switch 53b is set to OFF to complete the change of the set value. Note that the setting change button 53e also has a function as a reset button, and when the stop switch 53d is set to ON in the case where the MB end processing is performed (step S286 in FIG. 127), a game Also used when an error occurs.

  The automatic settlement switch 53c is a switch for setting whether or not a game medium credited at the end of the bonus is paid out. When the automatic settlement switch 53c is set to ON, gaming media are paid out, and when it is set to OFF, gaming media are not paid out. The stop switch 53d is a switch for setting whether or not to stop the game after the bonus is over. When the stop switch 53d is set to ON, the game is interrupted after the bonus ends, and the game is not resumed until the setting change button 53e is pressed. On the other hand, when the stop switch 53d is set to OFF, the game is continued without interruption after the bonus ends.

  Further, the stop switch 53d has a function as a setting means for setting whether or not to allow additional medals inserted by the player when the automatic insertion processing of medals is performed by replay winning. In the present embodiment, when the stop switch 53d is set on, the player allows additional insertion of medals, and when it is set off, the player prohibits additional insertion of medals. To do.

  Conventionally known pachislot machines have been set to increase the player's interest by increasing the probability of paying out medals by winning the bonus and shifting the gaming state to the bonus game. However, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by winning the internal winning combination related to the MB, the gaming state is changed to the RT0 gaming state (the general game with a low probability that the replay related to replay is determined as the internal winning combination) State) to the RT1 gaming state (high RT gaming state in which the probability that replay is determined as an internal winning combination is higher than the general gaming state), and in the RT1 gaming state, the MB gaming state operation pattern is awarded. Control to make it difficult.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the gaming state is difficult to shift from the RT1 gaming state to the MB gaming state, the possibility that the MB gaming state will end in a series of games is reduced, and the stop switch 53d is set to ON. Even so, the game is unlikely to be interrupted. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 that is unlikely to be hit, the next game is started after the replay wins the hitting switch 53d provided in the past (the start switch 79 detects the start operation). Even if it is used as a switch for setting whether or not additional medals can be inserted until the game flow is reduced, the possibility of impairing the flow of the game is reduced. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since there is a low possibility that the game is interrupted after the bonus is ended, the stop switch 53d that is originally used infrequently is used as a switch for setting whether or not additional insertion is possible. This eliminates the need to provide a new switch or the like.

  The main control board 71 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, and a door relay terminal board 68. The game operation display board 81 and the sub relay board 61 are connected. Here, since the selector 66, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted. In the present embodiment, as described above, the case where the stop switch 53d is connected to the power supply substrate 53f of the power supply device 53 will be described as an example. However, the stop switch 53d is connected to the power supply substrate 53f. For example, a configuration connected to the door relay terminal plate 68 is also possible.

The BET switch 77 detects that the player has pressed the BET button 22a or the MAXBET button 22b. When the BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22a is pressed once, a main medal 93 in the main control circuit 91, which will be described later, inserts one medal from medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Judged to be.
When the BET switch 77 detects that the MAXBET button 22b is pressed once, the main CPU 93 determines that three medals are inserted from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. . The BET switch 77 constitutes input operation detection means for detecting an input operation by the player.

  The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation). That is, the start switch 79 constitutes a start operation detecting unit that detects a start operation by the player.

  The stop switch substrate 80 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a circuit for displaying a stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 80 is provided with stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R corresponding to the respective stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R. The stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R detect that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed (stop operation) by the player. That is, the stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R constitute stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals in 7 segments when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be rotated and when replaying is performed. This is a substrate to be displayed on the device 24. The 7-segment display 24 and the LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. The LED 82 lights, for example, a mark for displaying the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, and the like.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. A sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 are connected to the sub control board 72 via a sub relay board 61. Here, since the LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The sound I / O board 84 outputs audio to the cabinet side speaker 42, the center speaker 58, the board speaker 64, the lower speakers 65L and 65R, and a speaker (not shown) provided on the front door 2b. .

  Further, a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing production images (video), sound, LED substrates 62A and 62B and other LED substrates (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

[Main control circuit]
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control circuit 91 includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program. The main RAM 95 records a credit counter value to be described later. The credit counter is a counter that records the number of credits of medals inserted by the player or medals automatically copied by replay winning. The main CPU 93 changes the value of the credit counter.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. It is detected by a reel position detector (not shown) provided with an intervening detection piece.

  Next, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 sets the maximum number of sliding symbols to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the reel display window 4 and each symbol within the range from the symbol to the four symbols ahead are displayed on the reel display window 4. It becomes a symbol that can be stopped in the middle.

[Sub control circuit]
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106. The sub control circuit 101 is provided with an RTC (Real Time Clock) (not shown).

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  The sub CPU 102 uses an image (including both a still image and a moving image) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on a command related to detection of a start operation by the start switch 79 among commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91. An effect display that is an effect is controlled.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. The control program includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting effect random numbers and determining and registering effect contents (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 7) based on the determined contents of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as the LED 85, and the speakers 42, 58, 64. , 65L, 65R, etc., a voice control task for controlling the sound output from the speaker.

  The data storage area is a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing presentation data constituting each presentation content, a storage area for storing animation data relating to video creation, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects. And a storage area for storing lamp data related to the light on / off pattern.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes a sound such as BGM to be output from speakers such as speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R in accordance with the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the turning on and off of the light source such as the LED 85 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

[Various data tables on the main control side (main side)]
10 to 37 show various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 (see FIG. 8).

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 21 symbol positions (symbol position data) “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  Symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “White BAR”, “Red BAR”, “Blue BAR”, “Pupil”, “Green Lip”, “Purple Lip”, “Blue Lip”, “Yellow Lip”, “Red Lip” , And "Vermilion Lip".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 assigns the symbol located in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the reel display window 4) to the symbol position “0” when the reel index is detected. A correspondence relationship in which symbol positions “0” to “20” are assigned to each of the 21 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation direction of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is defined.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the reel display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbol positioned in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 11, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 11 represents codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  As described above, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are “white BAR”, “red BAR”, “blue BAR”, “pupil symbol”, “green lip”, “purple lip”, “blue”. There are 10 types of “lip”, “yellow lip”, “red lip”, and “red lip”.

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the symbol “symbol code 1” of “white BAR”. “00000010” is assigned as data to the “red BAR” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned as data to the “blue BAR” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for the “pupil symbol”, “green lip”, “purple lip”, “blue lip”, “yellow lip”, “red lip”, and “red lip” symbols (symbol codes 4 to 10) However, “00000100” to “0000001010” are assigned as data.

<Internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay>
In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 12, the internal winning combination (small winning combination) that allows the display of the combination of symbols related to the payout of medals is displayed for the small winning combination / replay data pointer, An internal winning combination (replay combination) that allows display of a combination of symbols related to the operation of the game is associated.

  The internal winning combination is determined according to the small combination / replay data pointer “0” to “51” (however, if the small combination / replay data pointer is “0”, it is “lost” (When the data pointer for replay is “51”, the internal winning combination is “F_MB”).

  In this table, when the small role / replay data pointer is “1”, it means that “F_normal lip 1” is internally won.

  For example, “F_normal lip 1” indicates “C_white simple XX” and “C_center red BC” as shown in a comparison table (see FIGS. 14 to 17) of the internal winning combination and winning combination described later. ”,“ C_Red Ten × ○○ ”,“ C_Red Single ×× ○ ”,“ C_Red Single × ○ × 1 ”,“ C_Red Single × ○ × 2 ”, and“ C_Center Blue BC ” ”,“ C_blue ten ×× ○ ”,“ C_blue single ×× ○ ”,“ C_blue single × ○ × 1 ”,“ C_blue single ××× 2 ”, and“ C_center red different color ” BC ”,“ C_red different color ten × ○○ ”,“ C_center blue different color BC ”,“ C_blue different color ten × XX ”,“ C_pupil ”, and“ C_pupil tenth ”. ”,“ C_pupilation ten × XX1 ”,“ C_pupilation ten × XX2 ”,“ C_pupilation single ×× ○ 1 ”, and“ C_pupilation single ×× ○ 2 ” , “C_Normal Lip 1”, “C_Normal Lip 2”, “C_ Lip 3 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 4 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 5 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 6 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 7 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 8 ”, and“ C_Normal Lip 9 ” ”,“ C_normal lip 10 ”,“ C_normal lip 11 ”, and“ C_normal lip 12 ”are overlapped internally.

  Here, the small combination / replay data pointer “1” is a combination in which the winning combination is duplicated (duplicate combination). In the following description, for convenience, the internal pointer corresponding to the small combination / replay data pointer “1” is used. The winning role is described as “F_Normal Lip 1” by the name described in the remarks column.

  As for the small combination / replay data pointers “2” to “51”, the contents of the internal winning combination are shown in the comparison table of the internal winning combination and winning combination shown in FIGS. The detailed description is omitted here, and is described by the name described in the remarks column of FIG. 12, as in the case of the small role / replay data pointer “1”.

  For example, in the small combination / replay data pointers “2” to “4”, the internal winning combination is “F_normal rep 2 to 4”. Here, “F_normal lip 2” is also referred to as an internal winning combination “BAR loss” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later. Further, “F_normal lip 3” and “F_normal lip 4” are also referred to as an internal winning combination “added BAR” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 to be described later. Further, “F_normal lip 1” described above is also described as an internal winning combination “BAR alignment” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  Further, in the following description, “F_normal lip 1 to 4” are collectively referred to as normal replay. In addition, the normal replay is an internal winning combination that triggers the transition of the sub game state from the sub game state controlled by the sub control circuit 101 to the pseudo bonus state. Also described as a transitional role.

  Further, the small winning combination / replay data pointers “5” to “7” have the internal winning combination “F_Scroll Lips 1 to 3”. Here, “F_Scroll Lips 1 to 3” are also described as an internal winning combination “chance replay” (special replay combination) in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “8” has the internal winning combination “F_Premier Lip”. Here, “F_Premier Lip” is also referred to as an internal winning combination “Premier Flag” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, the small character / replay data pointers “9” to “17” have the internal winning combination “F_middle left / right bells 1 to 9”, and the small character / replay data pointers “18” to “26” have the internal winning combinations. The role is “F_middle right / left bell 1-9”, and the small role / replay data pointers “27” to “35” are “F_middle right bell 1-9” for the small role / replay. The data pointers “36” to “44” have an internal winning combination of “F_right middle left bell 1-9”, which is a so-called push order bell combination, and constitutes a predetermined internal winning combination in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the data pointer “45” for the small combination / replay has the internal winning combination “F_common bell”. Here, “F_common bell” is also referred to as an internal winning combination “common bell” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “46” has the internal winning combination “F_weak cherry”. Here, “F_weak cherry” is also referred to as an internal winning combination “weak cherry” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, the data pointer “47” for the small role / replay has the internal winning combination “F_strong cherry”. Here, “F_strong cherry” is also described as an internal winning combination “strong cherry” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, in the data pointers “48” to “50” for the small combination / replay, the internal winning combination is “F_chance combination 1 to 3”. Here, “F_chance combination 1 to 3” is also described as an internal winning combination “chance” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  The small / replay data pointers “0” to “51” are stored in the main ROM 94 as a data table. The table is composed of seven internal winning combination storing area data “0” to “6” each consisting of 1-byte data. For example, the small combination / replay data pointer “0” is associated with bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area data “0”. The small combination / replay data pointer “1” is associated with bit 1 of the internal winning combination storing area data “0”. Similarly, the small combination / replay data pointer “50” is associated with bit 2 of the internal winning combination storage area data “6”.

<Bonus internal winning combination determination table>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 13, the bonus data pointer is associated with an internal winning combination that allows display of a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus.

  In this table, the bonus data pointer is assigned with “0” corresponding to the loss and “1” corresponding to the F_CB combination in the MB gaming state. When the bonus data pointer is “1”, it means that “F_MB” has been won internally. This “F_MB” is a so-called predetermined bonus combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning roles and winning roles>
FIG. 14 to FIG. 17 are diagrams showing the correspondence relationship of winning combinations established in each internal winning combination.

  In FIG. 14 to FIG. 17, an internal winning combination with “◯” is a winning combination that may be established in each internal winning combination. For example, when the internal winning combination is “F_normal lip 1”, “C_white simple XX”, “C_center red BC”, “C_red ten × XX”, “ “C_red single ×× ○”, “C_red single ××× 1”, “C_red single ××× 2”, “C_center blue BC”, “C_blue ten ×× ○”, “C_blue single ××” “O”, “C_blue single × ○ × 1”, “C_blue single ××× 2”, “C_center red different color BC”, “C_red different color ten × XX”, “C_center blue different color BC”, “ C_Blue Different Color Ten × ○○, “C_Pupilation”, “C_Pupilation Ten × ○○”, “C_Pupilation Ten × XX1”, “C_Pupilation Ten × XX2”, “C_Pupil” Surgery ×× ○ 1 ”,“ C_Eye Surgery ×× ○ 2 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 1 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 2 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 3 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 4 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 5 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 6 ”,“ C One of “normal lip 7”, “C_normal lip 8”, “C_normal lip 9”, “C_normal lip 10”, “C_normal lip 11”, and “C_normal lip 12” is established as a winning combination. Have potential.

<Internal symbol combination table>
FIGS. 18 to 21 are symbol combination tables of internal winning combinations showing the relationship between the combination (combination) of symbols won by each internal winning combination and the number of medals to be paid out when winning each internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, combinations of symbols won by each internal winning combination are stored in the main ROM 94 as a data table. The table is composed of 26-byte data (storage area types) “0” to “25” each consisting of 1-byte data.

  18 to 21, the combination means a symbol combination (winning combination) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops. . In addition, the names of each winning combination come from a combination.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “F_normal lip 1” and the “green lip-blue lip-white BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle stage of the left reel 3L. “C_white single XX” is displayed by displaying “white BAR” only in the middle stage of the right reel 3R, excluding the middle stage of the middle reel 3C. The winning combination “C_white simple XX” is associated with bit 6 of data (storage area type) “1”.

  In addition, when “red BAR-red BAR-red BAR” is displayed in the middle row of the reel display window 4, “red BAR” is displayed in the middle row of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, “C_center red BC” is set. The winning combination “C_center red BC” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “1”.

  In addition, when “green lip-red BAR-red BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are those of the middle stage of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R except for the middle stage of the left reel 3L. “C_Red Ten × XX” is displayed by displaying “Red BAR” in the middle stage. The winning combination “C_Red Ten × XX” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue lip-red BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are the right reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C. Since “red BAR” is displayed only in the middle stage, “C_red single XX” is indicated. The winning combination “C_red simple xx” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  Further, when “green lip-red BAR-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are the middle reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the right reel 3C. Since “red BAR” is displayed only in the middle row, “C_red single × ◯ × 1” is set. The winning combination “C_red single × O × 1” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  Further, when “green lip-red BAR-red lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the right reel 3C. Since “red BAR” is displayed only in the middle stage, “C_red single × ◯ × 2” is distinguished from the above “C_red single × ◯ × 1”. The winning combination “C_red single × ◯ × 2” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  In addition, when “blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, “blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, “C_center blue BC” is obtained. The winning combination “C_center blue BC” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue BAR-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are those of the middle stage of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R except for the middle stage of the left reel 3L. By displaying “blue BAR” in the middle stage, “C_blue ten × XX” is displayed. The winning combination “C_blue ten × XX” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue lip-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are the right reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C. Since “blue BAR” is displayed only in the middle row, “C_blue simple XX” is indicated. The winning combination “C_blue simple xx” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue BAR-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are the middle reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the right reel 3C. Since “blue BAR” is displayed only in the middle row, “C_blue only × ○ × 1” is set. This winning combination “C_blue simple × O × 1” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  In addition, when “green lip-blue BAR-red lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the right reel 3C. By displaying “blue BAR” only in the middle row, “C_blue single × ◯ × 2” is distinguished from the above “C_blue single × ◯ × 1”. This winning combination “C_blue simple × O × 2” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  Further, when “red BAR-red BAR-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is “red BAR” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_center red different color BC” is set based on “red BAR”. The winning combination “C_center red different color BC” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  The name of the winning combination when “green lip-red BAR-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is “red BAR” in the middle of the middle reel 3C except for the middle of the left reel 3L. Is displayed, and “blue BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 3R, so that “C_red different color ten × ◯◯” is set based on “red BAR”. The winning combination “C_red different color ten × XX” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  Further, when “blue BAR-blue BAR-red BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “blue BAR” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “red BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_center blue different color BC” is set based on “blue BAR”. The winning combination “C_center blue different color BC” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue BAR-red BAR” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is “blue BAR” in the middle of the middle reel 3C except for the middle of the left reel 3L. Is displayed, and “red BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_blue different color ten × ◯◯” is set based on “blue BAR”. The winning combination “C_blue different color ten × XX” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  The name of the winning combination when “red BAR-pupil pattern-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “red BAR” in the middle of the left reel 3L. By displaying “pupil designs” on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R, “C_pupilation” is set based on the “pupil designs”. The winning combination “C_pupil” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  The name of the winning combination when “red BAR-yellow lip-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “red BAR” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Yellow Lip” is displayed in the middle stage, and “Pupil Design” is displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 3R, so that “C_Eye Art Ten ○○○” is based on the “Pupil Design”. The winning combination “C_pupil tentacle XX” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  The name of the winning combination when “green lip-pupil pattern-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “green lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Pupil design” is displayed on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R, respectively, so that “C_pupilation ten × ○○ 1” is based on the “pupil design”. The winning combination “C_pupilation ten × XX1” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  The name of the winning combination when “red lip-pupil symbol-pupil symbol” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “red lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. By displaying “pupil design” on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R respectively, the “C_pupilation tenth” is distinguished from the above “C_pupilation ten × XX1” on the basis of the “pupil design”. × XX2 ”. The winning combination “C_pupilation ten × XX2” is associated with bit 6 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  The name of the winning combination when “green lip-blue lip-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “green lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Blue Lip” is displayed in the middle, and “Pupil Design” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_Eye Art Single XX 1” is based on the “Pupil Design”. The winning combination “C_pupil single xxx 1” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  Further, the name of the winning combination when “red lip-blue lip-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “red lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Blue Lip” is displayed in the middle, and “Pupil Design” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that it is distinguished from the above “C_Eye Art Single XX ○ 1” based on the “Pupil Design”. , “C_pupil surgery single xx 2”. The winning combination “C_pupil single xx 2” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  In addition, when “blue lip-green lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the name of the middle reel 3C. “Clip Normal Lip 1” is displayed by displaying “Green Lip” in the middle row and “Yellow Lip” in the middle row of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 1” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “6”.

  Further, when “blue lip-green lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is displayed as “blue lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Clip Normal Lip 2” is displayed by displaying “Green Lip” in the middle row and “Red Lip” in the middle row of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 2” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “6”.

  Further, when “blue lip-blue lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “blue lip” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “Yellow Lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby “C_Normal Lip 3”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 3” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “6”.

  Further, when “blue lip-blue lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “blue lip” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “red lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 4”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 4” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  Further, when “green lip-green lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle part of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “green lip” in the middle part of the left reel 3L and the middle part of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “yellow lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 5”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 5” is associated with bit 6 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, when “green lip-green lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “green lip” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “red lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 6”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 6” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  Further, when “green lip-red lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “Red lip” is displayed in the middle row, and “yellow lip” is displayed in the middle row of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 7”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 7” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, the name of the winning combination when “green lip-red lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, “green lip” is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “Red lip” is displayed in the middle, and “red lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 8”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 8” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  Further, the name of the winning combination when “green lip-red lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “green lip” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L. “Clip normal lip 9” is displayed by displaying “red lip” in the middle and “yellow lip” in the middle of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 9” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, the name of the winning combination when “Green Lip-Red Lip-Red Lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, “Green Lip” is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L. By displaying “red lip” on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R, “C_normal lip 10” is obtained. The winning combination “C_normal lip 10” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, when “green lip-purple lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the name of the middle reel 3C. “Purple Lip” is displayed in the middle row, and “Yellow Lip” is displayed in the middle row of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_Normal Lip 11”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 11” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, the name of the winning combination when “green lip-purple lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, “green lip” is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “Purple Lip” is displayed in the middle row, and “Red Lip” is displayed in the middle row of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_Normal Lip 12”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 12” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “8”.

  18 to 21 define the number of medals to be paid out when each internal winning combination wins.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the combination of the internal winning combination relating to the re-game is the bit 7 to bit 0 of the data “0”, the bit 7 to bit 0 of the data “1”, and the data “2”. Bit 7 to Bit 0, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “3”, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “4”, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “5”, and Bit of Data “6” 7 to bit 0, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “7”, and bit 7 of data “8”.

  The internal winning combination related to the re-gamer has 0 medals to be paid out at the time of winning a prize. However, when the internal winning combination related to the re-gamer wins, the game can be executed again without inserting a medal. it can.

  Bit 6 to bit 0 of data “8”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “9”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “10”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “11”, and data “ 12 ”bit 7 to bit 0, data“ 13 ”bit 7 to bit 0, data“ 14 ”bit 7 to bit 0, data“ 15 ”bit 7 to bit 0, and data“ 16 ” Bit 7 to Bit 0, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “17”, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “18”, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “19”, and Bit of Data “20” 7 to bit 0, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “21”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “22”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “23”, and bit 7 to bit of data “24” Bit 0 and bit 7 of data “25” And bits 5, the internal winning combination of the combination of medals payout is executed, and the payout number of medals at winning each internal winning are correlated.

  Here, when each internal winning combination for which medals are paid out is multiplied by two medals, both medals are paid out. Therefore, in the following description, a case where three medals are multiplied will be described.

  In bit 0 of data “10” and bit 7 of data “11”, “C_Bell 1” and “C_Bell 2”, which are winning combinations in which a payout of 8 medals is executed as an internal winning combination, are performed. Are associated.

  Bits 6 to 0 of data “8” and bits 7 to 1 of data “9” are “C_” which is a winning combination in which two medals are paid out when winning a prize as an internal winning combination. “Normal cherries 1 to 14” are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of data “9” and bits 7 to 1 of data “10” are “C_Chance Cherry 1” which is a winning combination in which two medals are paid out when winning a prize as an internal winning combination. ˜8 ”are associated.

  In bits 6 to 0 of data “11”, as an internal winning combination, “C_chance combination A1”, “C_chance combination A2”, “C_ “Chance combination B1”, “C_chance combination B2”, “C_chance combination C1”, and “C_chance combination C2” are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of data “11”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “12”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “13”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “14”, and data “15” Bit 7 to bit 0 and bit 7 to bit 5 of data “16” include “C_left special × AA1” which is a winning combination in which a payout of one medal is executed at the time of winning as an internal winning combination. 4 ”,“ C_Left Special × AB1-4 ”,“ C_Left Special × AC1-4 ”,“ C_Left Special × BA1-4 ”,“ C_Left Special × BB1-4 ”,“ C_Left Special × BC1-4 ” 4 ”,“ C_left special × CA1-4 ”,“ C_left special × CB1-4 ”, and“ C_left special × CC1-4 ”are associated with each other.

  Bit 4 to bit 0 of data “16”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “17”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “18”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “19”, and data “ Bits 7 to 1 of “20” include “C_medium special A × A1 to A4”, “C_medium special A”, which are winning combinations in which a single medal is paid out at the time of winning as an internal winning combination. × B1-4 ”,“ C_Medium Special A × C1-4 ”,“ C_Medium Special B × A1-4 ”,“ C_Medium Special B × B1-4 ”,“ C_Medium Special B × C1-4 ”, “C_medium special C × A1-4”, “C_medium special C × B1-4”, and “C_medium special C × C1-4” are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of data “20”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “21”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “22”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “23”, and data “24” Bit 7 to bit 1 and bit 7 to bit 5 of data “25” are “C_right special AA × 1” which is a winning combination in which a single medal is paid out when winning a prize as an internal winning combination. ˜4 ”,“ C_Right Special AB × 1-4 ”,“ C_Right Special AC × 1-4 ”,“ C_Right Special BA × 1-4 ”,“ C_Right Special BB × 1-4 ”,“ C_ “Right Special BC × 1-4”, “C_Right Special CA × 1-4”, “C_Right Special CB × 1-4”, and “C_Right Special CC × 1-4” are associated with each other.

  Here, the name of the special combination (C_left special ..., C_middle special ..., C_right special ...) is the name of which of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R the first stop operation is executed on. It comes from. For example, when the winning combination is “C_left special × AA1” (see bit 0 of data “11”), the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, and “blue lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. -When “Red BAR-Red BAR” is displayed, a prize is awarded. When the winning combination is “C_medium special A × A1” (see bit 4 of data “16”), the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and “red” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. When “BAR-Yellow Lip-Red BAR” is displayed, a prize is awarded. When the winning combination is “C_right special AA × 1” (see bit 0 of data “20”), the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R, and “red” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. When "BAR-Red BAR-Blue Lip" is displayed, a prize is won.

  The winning combination “C_Bell 1” is a so-called eight-bell combination and is established by displaying “Green Lip-Yellow Lip-Blue Lip” in the middle of the reel display window 4 (see bit 0 of data “10”). ) And 8 medals are paid out.

  The winning combination “C_Bell 2” is a so-called eight-bell combination and is established by displaying “blue lip-blue lip-blue lip” in the middle of the reel display window 4 (see bit 7 of data “11”). ) And 8 medals are paid out. Here, the eight-bell combination of the winning combination “C_Bell 1 and 2” constitutes a combination having a predetermined symbol combination in the present embodiment.

  Each winning combination "C_Normal Cherry 1 (Red BAR-Blue Lip-Yellow Lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 2 (Red BAR-Blue Lip-Zhu Lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 3 (Blue BAR-Blue Lip-Yellow)" Lip "," C_Normal Cherry 4 (Blue BAR-Blue Lip-Red Lip) "," C_Normal Cherry 5 (White BAR-Blue Lip-Yellow Lip) "," C_Normal Cherry 6 (White BAR-Blue Lip-) "C_Normal Cherry 7 (Green Lip-Blue Lip-Yellow Lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 8 (Green Lip-Blue Lip-Zhu Lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 9 (Red Lip-Blue Lip) -C_normal cherry 10 (red lip-blue lip-red lip) "," C_normal cherry 11 (red lip-blue lip-yellow lip) "," C_normal cherry 12 (red lip-blue) Lip-Zhu Lip) "," C_Normal Cherry 13 (Purple Lip-Blue Lip- Descriptor) ", and" C_ usually cherry 14 (purple descriptor - Blue descriptor - Zhu descriptor) "are both two medals are paid out.

  Each winning role “C_Chance Cherry 1 (Red BAR-Yellow Lip-Yellow Lip)”, “C_Chance Cherry 2 (Red BAR-Yellow Lip-Zhu Lip)”, “C_Chance Cherry 3 (Blue BAR-Yellow Lip-Yellow) "C_ Chance Cherry 4 (Blue BAR-Yellow Lip-Zhu Lip)", "C_ Chance Cherry 5 (White BAR-Yellow Lip-Yellow Lip)", "C_ Chance Cherry 6 (White BAR-Yellow Lip-) “Chu Chance Lip”, “C_Chance Cherry 7 (Green Lip-Yellow Lip-Yellow Lip)”, and “C_Chance Cherry 8 (Green Lip-Yellow Lip-Yellow Lip)” all receive two medals. The

  Each winning combination “C_chance role A1 (blue lip-yellow lip-red BAR)”, “C_chance role A2 (blue lip-yellow lip-red lip)”, “C_chance role B1 (blue lip-yellow lip-blue) BAR) "," C_chance role B2 (blue lip-yellow lip-green lip) "," C_chance role C1 (blue lip-yellow lip-white BAR) ", and" C_chance role C2 (blue lip-yellow lip) " -"Purple lip" "is a so-called chance role, and one medal is paid out.

<Internal lottery table for general gaming state>
In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 22, the lottery value and the data pointer for each set value are associated with the winning number when the main gaming state is the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for lottery extracted from the predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which it is assigned will be determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  Here, when the number of times of determination processing for determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery processing is set to “lost”.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of the lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, and the internal winning combination defined by the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12). This is data for specifying.

  That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination / replay shown in FIG. 12 and the internal winning combination determination table for bonus shown in FIG. is there. For the data pointer, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of the plurality of winning numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the general game state internal lottery table, the setting value “6” is more set than the setting value “1” for some lottery values among the winning numbers “1” to “51”. It is set high. For example, for the winning numbers “5”, “6”, “7”, “45”, the lottery values of the setting value “1” are “327”, “327”, “327”, “820”, The lottery values of the set value “6” are “450”, “450”, “450”, and “900”.

  A lottery value common to the setting values “1” to “6” is associated with other winning numbers except the winning numbers “5”, “6”, “7”, and “45”.

  In the data pointer for a small role / replay, values corresponding to the winning numbers are associated with the winning numbers “1” to “50”, and “0” is associated with the winning number “51”. It has been.

  On the other hand, regarding the bonus data pointer, “0” is associated with the winning numbers “1” to “50”, and “1” is associated with the winning number “51”. .

  In the general gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “51” for the set values “1” to “6” may be shared.

<RT1 gaming state internal lottery table>
In the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state shown in FIG. 23, lottery values and data pointers for each set value are associated with the winning number when the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  Since the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is configured in substantially the same manner as the general gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 22, the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is different from the general gaming state internal lottery table. The description of the same parts as those in the general gaming state internal lottery table is omitted including illustration.

  When the number of times of the determination process for determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process is set as “losing”, but in this embodiment, the main gaming state is In the RT1 gaming state, the number of times of determination processing as to whether or not the result of subtraction is negative is set so as not to exceed the number of winning numbers.

  Since the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a bonus flag carry-over state in the MB gaming state that is not activated even if the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the set value “0” to In “6”, the lottery value of the winning number “51” corresponding to “F_MB” is set to “0”.

  Also, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “4” are higher than the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “4” in the general gaming state internal lottery table. Is set. In the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “51” for the set values “1” to “6” may be shared.

<Priority order table>
The priority order table shown in FIG. 24 defines the priority order of the number of sliding symbols when the main gaming state is other than the MB gaming state (non-MB gaming state). The priority order table indicates an order (hereinafter referred to as priority order) in which applicable numerical values are preferentially applied within a range of numerical values (ie, 0 to 6) of the sliding piece number determination data predetermined as the number of sliding pieces. Stipulate.

<MB game state priority order table>
The priority order table for MB gaming state shown in FIG. 25 defines the priority order of the number of sliding pieces when the main gaming state is in the MB gaming state. The MB gaming state priority order table defines the priority order of numerical values that can be applied from the numerical value range (ie, 0 or 1) of the sliding piece number determination data predetermined as the number of sliding pieces.

  In the priority order table and the MB gaming state priority order table, each numerical value is searched in order from the higher priority (1) to the lower priority (5), and as a result of the search, the numerical value corresponding to the priority order “1” Applied preferentially. The priority order table is provided assuming that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority order, and the number of sliding pieces having a higher priority order is applied.

  The priority order table and the MB gaming state priority order table in the present embodiment define the priority order based on the number of sliding piece determination data. That is, the priority order is defined so that the numerical value corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data is the highest. As a result, the data for determining the number of sliding symbols is determined preferentially over the number of other sliding symbols, so that the display of symbols intended during the development of the stop table is prioritized.

<Reel stop initial setting table>
In the reel stop initial setting table shown in FIG. 26, the drawing-in priority table selection data or the drawing-in priority table number and the stop table selection data group are associated with the spinning stop number. These various data indicate various table numbers to be selected in the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R according to the progress of one unit game.

  The pull-in priority table selection data is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 27 described later. The pull-in priority table number is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table shown in FIG.

  Details of the “stop table selection data group” are omitted, but a stop table or the like that stores the pressed positions of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R related to the first to third stop operations and the number of sliding pieces in association with each other is stored. It is a number for selection. These numbers are data used to determine “slip piece number determination data”, that is, to determine the positions at which the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped according to the progress of one unit game. .

  In the reel stop initial setting table, the drawing priority order table selection data is associated with the rotation stop number corresponding to the data pointer for which the stop control differs depending on the stop operation order (pushing order), and the stop operation is performed. The turn-in priority table number is associated with the rotation stop number corresponding to the data pointer for which stop control is performed regardless of the order.

<Pull-in priority table selection table>
In the pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 27, a pull-in priority table number for the stop operation type indicating the stop operation order is associated with each pull-in priority table selection data.

  For example, in the pull-in priority table selection data “00”, when the first stop operation is “left”, the pull-in priority table number “00” is associated with the second and third stop operations. When the first stop operation is “medium”, the pull-in priority table number “01” is also associated with the second and third stop operations.

  In the pull-in priority table selection data “00”, when the first stop operation is “right”, the pull-in priority table number “01” is associated. At the time of the second stop operation, when the first stop operation is “right”, the second stop operation is “left” (“right → left” in the figure), and the second stop operation is “middle”. In some cases (“right → middle” in the figure), the pull-in priority table number “01” is associated. During the third stop operation, when the first stop operation is “right” and the second stop operation is “left”, the third stop operation is “middle” (“right → left → middle” in the figure). ), And when the first stop operation is “right” and the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “left” (“right → middle → left” in the figure). Is associated with the pull-in priority table number “02”.

<Pull-in priority table>
The pull-in priority table shown in FIG. 28 indicates which symbol is to be preferentially drawn when there are a plurality of symbols (corresponding to the combination determined as an internal winning combination) that may be displayed within the pull-in range. Represents. In FIG. 28, the data of the winning action flag (winning combination) is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  In the draw-in priority table, draw-in priority data indicating the draw-in priority of the symbol combination related to the winning action flag is represented. The pull-in priority data is information provided for the main CPU 93 to identify the pull-in priority.

  Here, “retraction” means that the winning combination constituted by the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces is displayed along the winning line in the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. This means stopping rotation.

  For example, in the drawing priority table number “00”, it is determined that there is a possibility that the winning action flag “C_left special × CC1-4” and the winning action flag “C_medium special A × A1-4” may win. In this case, since “C_left special × CC1-4” has a higher priority than “C_middle special A × A1-4”, “C_left special × CC1-4” is preferentially drawn. Stop control of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

<Release counter lottery table>
The release counter lottery table shown in FIG. 29 is a table that is referred to when the value of the release counter is lottered in the reel effect lottery process shown in FIG. In the release counter lottery table, lottery of the value of the release counter of 10, 20, 30, or 40 is performed based on the spinning effect pattern determined in the reel effect lottery process.

  In this embodiment, random numbers for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range of “0-32767” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values corresponding to each winning number, so-called “digit” is generated. The value of the release counter is determined by determining whether or not it has been. The determined release counter value is stored in the release counter storage area of the main RAM 95.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
30 to 37 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95 (see FIG. 8).

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 30 is composed of seven storage areas of internal winning combination storing areas (storage area types) 0-6. The size of each of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the overall size of the internal winning combination storing areas 0 to 6 is 7 bytes. The internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6 store data determined based on the internal winning combination data (storage area type) defined by the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG.

  In the internal winning combination storing area shown in the figure, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 0 correspond to “losing”, “F_normal lip 1 to 4”, and “F_ scroll lip 1 to 3”, respectively. Yes.

  Similarly, bits 0 to 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 6 correspond to “F_chance combinations 1 to 3”, respectively, and bits 3 to 7 are unused.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 31 includes 26 storage areas of display combination storage areas (storage area types) 0 to 25. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 0 to 25 is 1 byte.

  Accordingly, the total size of the display combination storage areas 0 to 25 is 26 bytes. The display combination storage areas 0 to 25 store data determined based on the winning combination data (storage area type) defined by the symbol combination tables (bonus, replay, small combination) shown in FIGS. The data in the display combination storing area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the winning combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storing area, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the display combination storing area 0 are “C_white ten XX”, “C_white ten XX × 2”, and “C_white ten XX × 1”, respectively. ”,“ C_cross white BC2 ”,“ C_cross white BC1 ”,“ C_center white BC ”,“ C_MB2 ”, and“ C_MB1 ”.

  Similarly, bits 5 to 7 of the display combination storage area 25 correspond to “C_right special CC × 4”, “C_right special CC × 3”, and “C_right special CC × 2”, respectively. Bit 4 is unused.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 32 is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  In the symbol code storage area, data indicating a winning combination in a rotating reel is stored. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all the winning combinations can be won, so “1” is stored in all the corresponding bits in the symbol code storage area. Thereafter, when the left reel 3L is stopped (the reels 3C and 3R are rotated), the bit corresponding to the winning combination that cannot be won due to the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to “0”.

  Referring to FIGS. 18 to 21, for example, when the symbol “red BAR” is stopped in the middle reel 3 </ b> C, the symbol “C_normal” in which the symbol of the middle reel 3 </ b> C is “green lip”, “blue lip”, or the like. Bits corresponding to “Lip 1 to 12”, “C_normal cherry 1 to 14”, etc. are updated to “0”. On the other hand, the bits corresponding to “C_center red BC”, “C_cross red BC1-4”, etc., whose symbol of the middle reel 3C is “red BAR” are maintained at “1”.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 33 is 1 byte in size. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R that can detect a stop operation by the player, that is, effective stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R is detected immediately before. In this embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are unused and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the left stop button 19L. When the left stop button 19L is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 19C. When the middle stop button 19C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the right stop button 19R. When the right stop button 19R is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the left stop button 19L. When the left stop button 19L is valid, “1” is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 19C. When the middle stop button 19C is valid, “1” is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to the right stop button 19R. When the right stop button 19R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In this embodiment, “the stop button is valid” means that a stop operation can be detected. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed and capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 34 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R. This push-down order storage area is 1 byte in size, and bits 0 to 5 are used. Bits 6 and 7 are unused and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, when the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 1, and when the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit 2. Is stored (ON), “1” is stored in bit 3 if “middle → right → left”, and “1” is stored in bit 4 if “right → left → middle”. In the case of “right → middle → left”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 5.

<Carry-over portion storage area>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 35 is 1 byte in size. Bit 0 corresponds to “MB (F_MB)”, and bits 1 to 7 are unused. As a result of the internal lottery process, when the internal winning combination “F_MB” is determined, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storing area.

  By storing “1” in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area, it can be determined that the player is in the state of winning “F_MB”. The state in which “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area is held until the symbol combination corresponding to “C_MB1, 2” is displayed on the winning line.

  That is, when “F_MB” is won, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area in at least one unit game until the combination of symbols of these bonuses is displayed on the winning line as a display combination. The maintained state is maintained. Maintaining a state in which “1” is stored in bit 0 from the unit game winning the bonus to the unit game winning is called “carryover”. Further, “F_MB” stored in the carryover combination storage area is also referred to as “carryover combination”.

  When a stop operation is performed by the player and each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stops, the internal winning combination storing area is initialized, but the carryover combination storing area is not initialized. In this way, the “carry over” state can be maintained.

<Game state flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 36 stores a flag for indicating whether the main game state is the bonus game state or the RT1 game state, and has a size of 1 byte.

  Bit 0 and bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area relate to the bonus gaming state, and bit 2 relates to the RT1 gaming state. In the present embodiment, bits 3 to 7 of the game state flag storage area are unused.

  When the main gaming state is the bonus gaming state, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1” (on) in the MB gaming state, and in the gaming state flag storage area in the CB gaming state (winning state of F_CB role). When bit 1 is set to “1” (on) and the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1” (on).

<Retrieve priority data storage area>
The pull-in priority data storage area shown in FIG. 37 includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area.

  The contents (search symbol position and drawing priority data) of the drawing priority data storage area for the middle reel and the drawing priority data storage area for the right reel are the same as the drawing priority data storage area for the left reel. In the following, the left reel pull-in priority data storage area will be described.

  The left reel pull-in priority data storage area can store pull-in priority data (see FIG. 28) for each search symbol position (see symbol position data in FIG. 10). For example, for the symbol position data 0, a role (any one of 00EH to 000H) defined in the priorities 1 to 3 in FIG. 28 is defined. From these pull-in priority data, the internal winning combination and Depending on the stop positions of the other reels 3C and 3R, any pull-in priority data is stored. Thereby, the left reel 3L is controlled so as to stop or not stop the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination on the winning line.

  Similarly, for the symbol position data 1 to 20, the roles defined in the priority order are also defined. From these drawing priority data, the internal winning combination and the stop positions of the other reels 3L, 3C, 3R are determined. In response, any pull-in priority data is stored.

<Outline of gaming state controlled by sub-control>
38A to 38I are diagrams for explaining each piece of control information controlled by the sub control circuit 101. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to (i), the sub-control circuit 101 includes a sub-game state, a normal mode, a probability state, a pseudo bonus selection effect, an AT in-probability state, a special mode, and an AT. Control information of the continuation type, AT status flag, and penalty status is controlled.

  The sub game state shown in FIG. 38 (a) has a normal game state, a precursor state, a pseudo bonus transition state, a plurality of pseudo bonus states, and a plurality of AT states. When the bit corresponding to each sub game state is “1” (ON), the sub control circuit 101 executes an effect corresponding to each sub game state.

  In addition, the sub game state is set to the old sub game state in the sub game state storage area in the previous game, and the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area in the current game is updated. Each can be set in the secondary game state storage area as the secondary game state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state that is executed when the main gaming state is either the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state, and is a gaming state that is selected during normal gaming.

  The precursor state is a gaming state that is selected when winning a pseudo bonus type lottery executed at a pseudo bonus winning opportunity, which will be described later, and an effect different from the normal gaming state is executed during a predetermined number of game units. At the same time, a pseudo bonus promotion lottery for promoting the pseudo bonus state being won to a pseudo bonus state more advantageous to the player is executed.

  The pseudo bonus transition state is a gaming state that is executed when a pseudo bonus type lottery executed at a pseudo bonus winning opportunity described later is won, and a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect described later is executed, and a pseudo bonus transition is performed as a winning combination. Until winning a pseudo-bonus transitioning role (described later) including symbols (described later), a transition lottery in a pseudo-bonus state advantageous to the player and a promotion lottery (described later) in a pseudo-bonus state being won are executed to transfer a pseudo bonus This is a gaming state in which a pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation effect (described later) that can win a pseudo bonus transition symbol when winning a winning combination is executed.

  The pseudo bonus state is a pseudo bonus type lottery executed in a pseudo bonus winning opportunity, which will be described later. This is a gaming state that shifts when a screen navigation effect (described later) is executed, and is composed of first to sixth pseudo bonus states that differ in the effect content.

  Here, the pseudo bonus state refers to the pseudo bonus state in the lottery process executed for each unit game by the sub-control circuit 101 during the RT1 gaming state which is the high RT state, and “F_normal rep. 4 ”, and when one of the predetermined specific conditions is established that the stop button 19L, 19C, 19R is stopped by a specific pressing order by the player, the sub control circuit 101 executes In the gaming state, a pseudo bonus transition symbol (described later) is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, and the sub-control circuit 101 performs an effect that simulates a so-called bonus gaming state. In the pseudo bonus state, push order navigation (described later) for winning the eight-bell combination is notified eight times as a predetermined number of times.

  The first to fifth pseudo bonus states are game states in which push order navigation (described later) for notifying a push order for winning the eight-bell combination is executed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, eight times). is there. In the sixth pseudo bonus state, push order navigation (to be described later) for winning the eight-bell combination is executed differently from the first to fifth pseudo bonus states (20 times in the present embodiment). The The production contents in each pseudo bonus state will be described later.

  The sub control circuit 101 stores the pseudo bonus types 0 to 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table. Here, in the pseudo bonus type stock table, the pseudo bonus type won by the pseudo bonus type lottery is stored at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table and at the top of the pseudo bonus type stock table Is a table set as a pseudo bonus type of a pseudo bonus state to be executed.

  Here, in the following description, the case where the pseudo bonus type lottery is won is the case where any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is won in the pseudo bonus type lottery.

  The push order navigation means that when a specific winning combination is won by depressing the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R in a predetermined pushing order, the predetermined pushing order is notified. For example, when the predetermined pressing order is the order of the stop button 19C, the stop button 19R, and the stop button 19L, the “middle-right-left” pressing order navigation is selected, and the player presses the predetermined pressing order. The order is announced. Further, of the push order navigations, the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination constitutes information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of game media in the present embodiment.

  Further, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect means that a pseudo bonus state is won, and when the pseudo bonus transition state process shown in FIG. This is an effect of executing a screen navigation effect.

  The pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation effect is an effect that is executed when the internal bonus is played in the normal bonus replay and the push order bell that are the pseudo bonus transition role in the pseudo bonus transition state. When a normal replay is won internally, a push order navigation that can win a pseudo bonus state and display a pseudo bonus transition pattern that suggests to the player the content of the pseudo bonus state to be transferred is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. As the game is executed, the player is notified that the pseudo bonus state is started from the next game. When the push order bell is won internally, push order navigation for winning the 8-bell role is executed according to the effect gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 91.

  The AT state is the contents related to the winning of the AT state among the AT winning numbers having different contents in the ART lottery as the specific effect state transition lottery executed in a predetermined winning opportunity including the case where the pseudo bonus type lottery is won. Is an auxiliary game state selected when a predetermined number of push order navigations are executed in each pseudo bonus state, and a push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is executed. A secondary gaming state.

  When the secondary gaming state becomes the AT state, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is the RT1 gaming state in which the main gaming state has a high winning probability of the replay role, and the secondary gaming state is the AT state. It becomes ART game state. Here, the AT winning number will be described later.

  The AT state includes a first AT state as the first specific effect state, a second AT state as the second specific effect state, and a pseudo bonus promotion game state as the third specific effect state. Each game state is a game state in which push order navigation with 8 bells is performed, and the number of games is determined at the start of each AT state. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 is configured to shift to the first AT state when shifting from the pseudo bonus state to the AT state, and shift to the second AT state after the first AT state ends. The first AT state and the second AT state of one time become one set of AT states.

  Here, in the first AT state, when the pseudo bonus state is won during the first AT state, lottery is executed to increase the number of games in the first AT state when the corresponding pseudo bonus state is executed. This is a secondary game state. Further, the second AT state notifies that the AT state continuously shifts from the second AT state to the first AT state when the pseudo bonus state is won during the second AT state, and This is a secondary gaming state in which, when the second AT state ends, a continuous effect is determined as to whether or not to continue the transition from the second AT state to the first AT state. Here, in the second AT state, a group of characters is displayed in the longitudinal left area and the longitudinal right area of the liquid crystal display device 11, respectively. ) And the character group (enemy) displayed in the region on the right side in the longitudinal direction are each reduced from the initial display. In addition, in the case of continuous transition to the first AT state, at least one character of the character group (ally) is displayed in the left region in the longitudinal direction until the end of the second AT state. When the transition to the first AT state is not continued, at least one character of the character group (enemy) continues to be displayed in the region on the right side in the longitudinal direction until the end of the second AT state. In addition, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is different from the first AT state and the second AT state, and in the pseudo bonus type lottery (described later) executed in the first AT state and the second AT state, This is a gaming state that shifts to the case of winning 5 or 6, and is a gaming state in which a lottery is executed as to whether or not the pseudo bonus state being hit is promoted to a pseudo bonus additional state that is more advantageous to the player. is there.

  The normal mode shown in FIG. 38 (b) is composed of normal modes 1 to 5, and each is stored in the normal mode storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change the probability table referred to in each lottery process according to the normal mode to be selected.

  Here, in the normal lottery bonus winning ART lottery and the probability state lottery, when the normal mode 2 is selected as the normal mode, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 is when the normal mode 1 is selected. Compared with the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101, the winning probability of the AT winning number advantageous to the player is set higher. Further, the table referred to by the sub control circuit 101 when the normal mode 3 is selected as the normal mode is different from the table referred to by the sub control circuit 101 when the normal mode 2 is selected. The winning probability of the AT winning number that is advantageous to the player is set high.

  When the normal mode 4 or 5 is selected, the sub-control circuit 101 is configured to always win the AT state in the normal medium bonus bonus lottery when winning the pseudo bonus type lottery. . In the normal medium bonus bonus ART lottery and the probability state lottery, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the normal mode 5 is selected as the normal mode is the table when the normal mode 4 is selected. Compared with the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101, the winning probability of the AT state that is advantageous to the player is set high.

  The probability state shown in FIG. 38C is composed of low accuracy, high accuracy, and ultra high accuracy. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change a probability table referred to in each lottery process according to the probability state to be selected.

  Here, in the normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery and the probability state lottery, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the high probability is selected as the probability state is the sub table when the low probability is selected. Compared with the table referred to by the control circuit 101, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state, the AT state, the probability state, and the number of precursor games, which is advantageous to the player, is set high. In addition, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the ultra-high probability is selected as the probability state is compared with the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the high-precision is selected. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state, the AT state, the probability state, and the number of precursor games, which is advantageous to the player, is set high.

  The pseudo bonus selection effect as the effect mode shown in FIG. 38D is composed of first to third pseudo bonus selection effects, and each is stored in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to execute the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected by the player when executing the first to fourth pseudo bonus states.

  Among the pseudo bonus selection effects, the first pseudo bonus selection effect as the first effect mode and the second pseudo bonus selection effect as the second effect mode have different effects and are in the AT state. When winning, the main control circuit 91 and the sub-control circuit 101 are controlled by the notification timing for executing the first AT state notification effect and the second AT state notification effect in which it is notified that the AT state has been won. This is an effect that suggests each game information to the player.

  Here, the notification timing is a timing at which it is announced that the AT state has been won, and when the AT state has been won, eight sheets at the time when the fact that the AT state has been won in the pseudo bonus state has been announced. The eight notification timings 1 to 8 are set in the sub-control circuit 101 according to the remaining number of winnings for the bell combination, and the set notification timing is stored in the notification timing counter. For example, when the notification timing 8 is set, 7 is stored in the notification timing counter because the remaining number of wins for the eight-bell role is seven.

  The first pseudo bonus selection effect is an effect suggesting which of the setting “1” to the setting “6” is the setting value selected by the main control circuit 91 according to the notification timing. The second pseudo bonus selection effect is an effect that suggests a loop rate (described later) of the AT state that is won by the notification timing.

  The third pseudo bonus selection effect as the third effect mode is a player who selects the normal mode that the sub control circuit 101 selects from the next game when the AT state is not won at the end of the pseudo bonus state. This suggests which of the normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables (see (a) to (c) of FIGS. 54 to 56) is referred to in the next normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery. It is a production that suggests.

  In this way, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting different game information for each of the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected at the start of the pseudo bonus state. The range of strategies for games can be expanded. Here, the game information is each piece of control information related to a game controlled by the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101.

  The during-AT probability state shown in FIG. 38 (e) is composed of the same color normal and the same color high accuracy, and is stored in the in-AT probability state storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change a probability table to be referred to in each lottery process according to the in-AT probability state to be selected.

  Here, a pseudo bonus lottery during the first AT state (see FIGS. 74A and 74B) and a pseudo bonus lottery during the second AT state (see FIGS. 75A to 75B, respectively). ), The table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the same color accuracy is selected as the AT probability state is compared with the table referenced by the sub-control circuit 101 when the same color normal is selected. Thus, in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect described later, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which the same color symbol can be displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 is set high.

  In the AT state, when a normal replay is won as an internal winning combination, a replay symbol for notifying that a normal replay has been won is displayed in three symbol display areas (not shown) provided on the liquid crystal display device 11. Although displayed in a single row, when the same color accuracy is selected, replay symbols of the same color are more easily displayed in a single row than when the same color normal is selected. In addition, when the same color normal is selected, at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a row is likely to be different in color compared to the case where the same color accuracy is selected. Here, the sub control circuit 101 notifies the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 that the player has won the normal replay not only during the AT state but also when the sub gaming state is the normal gaming state, for example. Display replay symbols in a row. At this time, when the same color high accuracy is selected, the replay symbols of the same color are more easily displayed in a line than when the same color normal is selected. In addition, when the same color normal is selected, at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a row is likely to be different in color compared to the case where the same color accuracy is selected.

  For this reason, when the same color high accuracy is selected, the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 can easily display the replay symbols of the same color in a line in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state. It is configured so that the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state where the symbol of the same color can be displayed is increased, and it is suggested that the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state where the symbol of the same color can be displayed by winning the replay symbol of the same color is high. .

  In addition, when the same color normal is selected, the sub CPU 102 tends to have a different color replay symbol in at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a line in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state. In the case where the winning probability of the pseudo-bonus state in which the symbol can be displayed is increased, and at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a row in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 is a different color replay symbol. In addition, it is suggested that the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which a different color pattern can be displayed is high.

  The special mode shown in FIG. 38F is composed of special modes 1 to 6 and stored in the special mode storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change the probability table referred to in each lottery process according to the special mode to be selected.

  The sub-control circuit 101 selects special modes 1 to 5 based on a special mode table determined by referring to a special mode table reference table (see FIG. 63) based on a special table and special table information described later. In addition, the sub-control circuit 101 switches to the other special modes 1 to 5 when it wins the AT winning number associated with the execution of the special mode 6 in the lottery process of the AT state executed at a predetermined winning opportunity. The special mode 6 is selected with priority. The sub-control circuit 101 selects the special mode 1 as the special mode in the initial state.

  Here, the special modes 2 to 4 may be selected redundantly. For example, when the special mode 2 and the special mode 3 are selected redundantly, in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the second AT state. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state is referred to.

  Further, in the special mode, in the second AT state pseudo bonus type lottery (see step S666 in FIG. 158) described later, the sub CPU 102 has a plurality of different winning probabilities that are determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state. This is referred to when determining which one of the two pseudo bonus lottery tables during AT state (see (a) and (b) of FIGS. 75 to 84) is selected.

  The AT continuation type shown in FIG. 38 (g) is composed of no continuation, continuation, and special continuation, and is stored in the AT continuation type storage area. The AT continuation type is determined as an AT continuation lottery executed in the first AT state start process (see FIGS. 154 and 155). Here, in the AT continuation lottery, when it is determined that the continuation of the AT continuation type is “no continuation”, the sub-control circuit 101 ends the AT state without shifting to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state. On the other hand, in the AT continuation lottery, when the continuation or special continuation is determined as the AT continuation type, the sub-control circuit 101 continues the AT state by shifting to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state.

  In addition, in the AT continuation lottery, when the special continuation is determined as the AT continuation type, the sub-control circuit 101 continues as the AT continuation type in the second AT state processing (see FIGS. 158 to 160). As an effect different from that determined, an effect of displaying characters of a predetermined number of persons (10 persons in the present embodiment) in the region on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 11 is executed and a special condition is established. It is configured to perform special effects in cases. Here, the special condition is a condition that is satisfied when a value set in a special continuation game number counter (described later) is not 0 when the second AT state ends. The special effect means that when a special condition is satisfied, the ten characters (friends) displayed in the region on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 11 are not reduced by one, and the liquid crystal display device 11 This is an effect that suggests to the player that the AT state stock is generated by executing an effect in which the characters (enemies) displayed in the area on the right in the longitudinal direction are no longer present, and is stored in the AT continuation type storage area. This is one of a plurality of continuous notification modes for reporting the set AT continuation type.

  The AT state flag shown in FIG. 38 (h) includes a loop lottery state, a first AT state game number lottery state, a special mode lottery state, and a first AT state effect state. Each state constituting the AT state flag is composed of three flags: a normal time flag, a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state, and a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state. Has been.

  Here, the normal time flag is a flag that is selected when the initial state and other flags are not selected. Further, the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state is a flag that is selected when the pseudo bonus state is won in the first AT state. Further, the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state is a flag that is selected when the pseudo bonus state is won in the second AT state.

  The penalty state shown in FIG. 38 (i) is composed of a plurality of first to sixth penalties as a plurality of predetermined disadvantages, each of which has different disadvantages given to the player, and push order navigation is executed. The first stop operation is executed on a stop button other than the stop button 19L in the absence of the result, and a sequence error occurs when the win is won for the eight-belt and the sub-control circuit 101 does not receive a winning operation command (described later). Is executed when at least one of the above occurs and a predetermined disadvantage is given to the player. Here, the sequence error is generated in a normal game when each command is received by the sub control circuit 101 in the transmission / reception process of each command executed between the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101. This error is detected when commands are received in an unobtainable order.

  The first penalty as the first disadvantage is that the normal-time precursor game number lottery process (see step S459 in FIG. 142) of the normal middle process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 when the secondary game state is the normal game state. ) In FIG. 97 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 98 (a) to (d), the lottery table is used for lottery and the number of precursor games is not given, so that the secondary game state is not given. It is configured to give the disadvantage of not moving to the precursor state.

  As a result of the first penalty, the secondary gaming state does not shift to the precursor state, the secondary control circuit 101 can select one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 by the normal pseudo bonus type lottery (see step S444 in FIG. 142). When winning, the player is disadvantaged not to execute the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (see step S480 in FIG. 146) that can promote the corresponding pseudo bonus type by not executing the precursor state. be able to.

  The second penalty as the second disadvantage is a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (see step S480 of FIG. 146) of the warning process executed by the secondary control circuit 101 when the secondary game state is the warning state. In the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (see step S515 of FIG. 148) of the pseudo bonus transition state process executed by the sub control circuit 101 when the sub game state is the pseudo bonus transition state, FIG. 49 (f), FIG. By performing lottery using the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in 50 (f), a disadvantage that the pseudo bonus is not promoted is provided.

  Due to the second penalty, the sub-control circuit 101 does not promote to the pseudo bonus state that is more advantageous for the player from the pseudo bonus state that is won in each pseudo bonus promotion lottery process. Even in the case of transition to the pseudo bonus transition state, a disadvantage that the pseudo bonus type is not promoted can be given to the player.

  The third penalty as a third disadvantage is a normal transition high-precision game number lottery process executed by the secondary control circuit 101 when the secondary gaming state is the normal gaming state (see step S462 in FIG. 143). ), A lottery is performed using the high-precision transition game number lottery table shown in FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (d), thereby giving a disadvantage that the probability state is not shifted with high accuracy or ultra high accuracy. .

  By the third penalty, the probability state in the high-accuracy transition game number lottery process does not shift with high accuracy or ultra-high accuracy, so that the sub control circuit 101 does not shift the probability state from low probability, so that the probability state is changed. Giving the player the disadvantage that the probability of winning a loss is higher in the ART lottery during normal medium pseudo bonus winning (see step S448 in FIG. 142) than in the case of shifting to high accuracy or ultra high accuracy. Can do.

  The fourth penalty as the fourth disadvantage is based on the pseudo bonus transition combination of the pseudo bonus transition state process (see FIG. 148) executed by the sub control circuit 101 when the sub gaming state is the pseudo bonus transition state. In the process of executing the effect (see step S510 in FIG. 148) and the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery (see step S513 in FIG. 148), refer to the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table shown in FIG. Thus, there is a disadvantage of not performing the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination performed when winning the push order bell combination, and the push order navigation performed when winning the pseudo bonus transition combination. Is configured to give.

  By the fourth penalty, each push order navigation is not executed in the pseudo bonus transition state, so that the sub control circuit 101 does not win the eight-bell combination and changes the sub game state from the pseudo bonus transition state to the pseudo bonus state. The player can be given the disadvantage of not migrating.

  A fifth penalty as a fifth disadvantage is a process of adding 1 to a pseudo bonus ceiling counter (described later) of normal mid-process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 when the sub-game state is the normal game state (see FIG. 142) (see step S443 of 142).

  When the value of the pseudo bonus ceiling counter is not added by the fifth penalty, the sub-control circuit 101 always makes a pseudo bonus bonus for the normal pseudo bonus type 1 to 8 in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery. It is possible to give the player a disadvantage that the number of unit games necessary for referring to the lottery table (see FIG. 48D) increases.

  A sixth penalty as a sixth disadvantage is a normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery process (a step in FIG. 142) of normal normal processing executed by the sub control circuit 101 when the secondary gaming state is the normal gaming state. In S448), it is configured so as to always give a disadvantage that is not ART.

  By making sure that the ART penalty is not won by the sixth penalty, the sub-control circuit 101 is in the penalty state, even if it wins any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8, after the pseudo bonus state ends. The player can be given the disadvantage of not transitioning to the first AT state.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined disadvantageous conditions of a plurality of types are determined such that the first stop operation is performed on stop buttons other than the stop button 19L in a state where the push order navigation is not performed, and 8 The sub-control circuit 101 includes a case where a winning combination is made and a case where the sub-control circuit 101 does not receive a winning operation command as a predetermined command and a sequence error occurs.

  Each storage area and each counter described above are provided in predetermined areas of the sub-control circuit 101, respectively.

[Various control side data tables]
39 to 111 are various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. In each table shown in FIGS. 39 to 111, each item corresponding to the internal winning combination also corresponds to the displayed combination.

<Normal mode reference table lottery table when setting is changed>
The setting change normal mode reference table lottery table shown in FIG. 39 is a table that is referred to when determining the table in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 139. In FIG. 39, only the cases of setting 1 and setting 6 are described, but this is an example, and in the case of settings 2 to 5, a predetermined probability is set for each table.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the normal mode reference table lottery table at the time of setting change, lottery values different in setting values “1” to “6” are associated with the winning probabilities of the respective tables.

<Normal mode reference table>
The normal mode reference table shown in FIG. 40 is a table that is referred to when determining the normal mode in the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 142 and 143 and the common processing at the end of ART shown in FIG. 163. In the normal mode reference table, normal mode numbers 1 to 5 associated with the normal modes 1 to 5 are stored.

  In the normal mode reference table shown in FIG. 40, “pseudo bonus 0 to 10 times” represents the number of AT state non-winnings that did not win the AT state at the time of winning the pseudo bonus type lottery. Initialized by winning the AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the normal mode number is determined from the AT state non-winning count of the pseudo bonus type lottery and the selected table. For example, the state where the pseudo bonus type lottery has not been won since the power is turned on or after the ART state ends, that is, the number of times that the AT state was not won when the pseudo bonus type lottery was won is 0, and the table A is selected as the table If it is, the normal mode is determined as the normal mode 1 because the normal mode number 1 is stored in the normal mode reference table.

  In addition, when the tables A to Y are selected, the normal mode reference table has a specific number of AT state non-winning times defined for each table (for example, 9 for the table A and 4 for the table W). The normal mode number 4 is stored so that the normal mode 4 is determined.

  In addition, when the table Z is selected, the normal mode reference table shifts to the normal mode 5 in which the player shifts to the AT state that is more advantageous to the player than when the normal mode 4 is determined when the next pseudo bonus type lottery is won. As determined, the normal mode number 5 is stored.

<Normal mode reference table lottery table at AT end>
The AT end normal mode reference table lottery table shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 (a) and (b) is a table referred to when determining a table in the common process at the end of ART shown in FIG. 163. is there.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, in the AT end normal mode reference table lottery table, each table AZ includes lottery values that are different from the previously selected tables AZ. Are associated.

<Highly accurate transition game number lottery table>
43 to 46, the high-probability transition game number lottery tables shown in FIG. 43 to FIG. 46 are the normal middle process shown in FIG. 142 and FIG. 143 and the pseudo bonus end process shown in FIG. 152 and FIG. It is a table referred when determining a probability state.

  As shown in each of (a) to (d) of FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, the high-probability transition game number lottery table differs depending on the normal mode and probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. A lottery table is configured to be selected. For example, when the normal mode is the normal mode 1 and the probability state is low probability, the high-probability transition game number lottery table shown in FIG. 43A is selected.

  As shown in each of (a) to (d) of FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, each probability state and the number of games in which the probability state continues in each highly probable game number lottery table are different for each internal winning combination. A lottery value is associated, and the probability status is low to high when winning a common bell, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “chance replay” and “chance eye” as an internal winning combination. It is a lottery value that is easy to transition from high accuracy to ultra high accuracy and that is easy to maintain ultra high accuracy.

  46A to 46D, when the value of the normal penalty counter (described later) is not 0, the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101 is low. It is a table that is referred to regardless of whether it is accurate, highly accurate, or ultra-highly accurate.

  As shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D, the high-probability game number lottery table that is referred to when the value of the normal penalty counter is not 0 differs depending on the normal mode selected by the sub-control circuit 101. A high-precision transition game number lottery table is selected. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D, the high-probability transition game number lottery table that is referred to when the value of the normal penalty counter is not 0 is used regardless of the internal winning combination. A lottery value is assigned so that “no high probability win” is always selected.

<Pseudo bonus reference table>
The pseudo bonus reference table shown in FIG. 47 is a table in which the effect contents of each pseudo bonus to be executed in the pseudo bonus transition state process shown in FIG. 148 and the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 150 and 151 are set.

  In the pseudo bonus reference table shown in FIG. 47, the pseudo bonus information of the pseudo bonus type, the pseudo bonus color type, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag, and the pseudo bonus navigation counter correspond to the first to sixth pseudo bonus states, respectively. It is attached.

  The pseudo bonus type is a value used by the sub control circuit 101 to identify the winning pseudo bonus state in each control process by the sub control circuit 101 to be described later, and the pseudo bonus type 1 is the first pseudo bonus state. , Pseudo bonus type 2 is associated with the second pseudo bonus state, pseudo bonus type 3 is associated with the third pseudo bonus state, and pseudo bonus type 4 is associated with the fourth pseudo bonus state. The pseudo bonus type 7 is associated with the fifth pseudo bonus state, and the pseudo bonus type 8 is associated with the sixth pseudo bonus state.

  Further, the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 are associated with the first and second pseudo bonus states, respectively, and when the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 are selected, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is executed. It is configured as follows.

  Since the first and second pseudo bonus states are associated with the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6, the sub control circuit 101 performs the pseudo bonus promotion lottery (see step S757 in FIG. 164) in the third specific effect state. ), When the end condition (described later) for ending the third specific effect state without winning the pseudo bonus type 7 is satisfied, the sub game state is shifted to the first and second pseudo bonus states. Is configured to do.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment changes the sub game state to the first and second simulated game states even in the simulated bonus promotion game state, even when the transition to the pseudo bonus added state (described later) is not determined. In order to shift to the bonus state, many benefits can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  The pseudo bonus color type is a value used to identify a symbol combination that can be displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 when the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state to each pseudo bonus state. The bonus color type 1 is associated with the display of “red BAR-red BAR-red BAR”, the pseudo bonus color type 2 is associated with the display of “blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR”, and the pseudo bonus color type 3 Is associated with the display of “red BAR-red BAR-blue BAR”, the pseudo bonus color type 4 is associated with the display of “blue BAR-blue BAR-red BAR”, and the pseudo bonus color type 5 is “white BAR”. -White BAR-White BAR ".

  The pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag is a value used by the sub-control circuit 101 to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state, which will be described later, and when the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag is 1. The pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is executed.

  The pseudo bonus navigation counter is associated with the number of times that the eight-bell push order navigation is executed in each pseudo bonus game state.

  Here, the first to fourth pseudo bonus states are based on the pseudo bonus color types associated with each other, and in the following description, the first pseudo bonus state is the red same color pseudo bonus state, and the second pseudo bonus state is blue. The same color pseudo-bonus state, the third pseudo-bonus state will be referred to as a red different color pseudo-bonus state, and the fourth pseudo-bonus state will be referred to as a blue different-color pseudo bonus state. Further, in the fifth pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus color type is 1, but the pseudo bonus ART lottery (see (a in FIGS. 58 to 60) in the pseudo bonus middle processing (see FIGS. 150 and 151) described later). ), (B)), when a pseudo bonus transition symbol (to be described later) is displayed, a pseudo-bonus ART lottery table with a high probability of winning an AT winning number having a content that adds the number of sets in the AT state ( 60 (a) and 60 (b)), the pseudo special game added state in the present embodiment is configured, and in the following description, the fifth pseudo bonus state is also referred to as the pseudo bonus added state. Describe. The sixth pseudo bonus state is also referred to as a special pseudo bonus state in the following description from the associated pseudo bonus navigation counter.

<Normal pseudo bonus lottery table>
The normal time pseudo bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48A to 48D are tables that are referred to when the pseudo bonus type lottery is executed in the normal medium processing shown in FIGS. 142 and 143.

  As shown in FIGS. 48A to 48C, the normal time pseudo bonus lottery table is configured such that different normal time pseudo bonus lottery tables are selected depending on the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. Yes. For example, when the probability state is low probability, the normal time pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG.

  The normal pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 48 (d) is a table that is selected when a pseudo bonus ceiling counter (described later) reaches a predetermined value. The “BAR lost”, “BAR aligned”, The winning probabilities for the respective types of pseudo bonuses are set so as to always win the first to fourth or sixth pseudo bonus states when an internal winning combination other than “add-on BAR” is won.

  In each normal pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 48C, the normal-time pseudo bonus lottery table selected when the probability state is extremely high is shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B when the probability state is low or high. Compared with the normal pseudo bonus lottery table shown in b), the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set higher.

<Pseudo bonus promotion lottery table>
49 and FIG. 50, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 50 (f) includes the warning process shown in FIG. 146, the pseudo bonus transition state process shown in FIG. 148, and the first one shown in FIGS. 156 and 157. 16 is a table that is referred to when a pseudo bonus promotion lottery is executed in the AT state process, the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, and the pseudo bonus promotion game state process shown in FIG. Here, the promotion lottery is a process of determining by lottery whether or not the currently awarded pseudo bonus state is promoted to a pseudo bonus state that is more advantageous to the player.

  As shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table is a pseudo bonus color type of each control process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 and a pseudo bonus state currently being won. Different pseudo bonus promotion lottery tables are selected. For example, the pseudo-bonus color in which the sub-control circuit 101 executes a pre-signed lottery lottery process, and the pseudo-bonus color type in the pseudo-bonus state currently being won can be displayed in the pseudo-bonus confirmation screen effect in the same color combination In the case of types 1 and 2, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 49A is selected.

  In each pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, each pseudo bonus state that can be promoted is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (e), the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus color type is the pseudo bonus color type 1 or 2, the pseudo value of the pseudo bonus type 5 to 7 is used for the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table. It is associated with the bonus state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus color type is the pseudo bonus color type 3 or 4 indicates that the lottery value is the pseudo bonus type 1 or 2. Are associated with the pseudo bonus state.

  49 and 50, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 49 (f) is used when the value of the normal penalty counter (described later) is not 0 and when the value of the pseudo bonus penalty counter (described later) is not 0. The table is referred to when any of the control processes executed by the sub control circuit 101 is performed.

  49 and 50, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table that is referenced when the value of the normal penalty counter is not 0 and when the value of the pseudo bonus penalty counter is not 0, Different pseudo bonus promotion lottery tables are selected depending on the pseudo bonus color type in the pseudo bonus state.

  49 and 50, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table referred to when the value of the normal penalty counter is not 0 and when the value of the pseudo bonus penalty counter is not 0 is The lottery value is assigned so that “no shift” is always selected regardless of the internal winning combination.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 has a symbol combination of the same symbol as compared to a pseudo bonus state in which a symbol combination of a different symbol can be displayed when the gaming state moves to the pseudo bonus state. The pseudo bonus state that can be displayed is configured to be more advantageous to the player.

<Pseudo bonus confirmation screen production navigation lottery table>
The pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 is executed to shift the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state in the pseudo bonus transition state process shown in FIG. It is a table referred when determining push order navigation.

  As shown in (a) to (e) of FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table is managed by the pseudo bonus type and main control circuit 91 in the pseudo bonus state being won. Different pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery tables are selected depending on the effect game state.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 (a), (c), (e), and FIG. 52 (b), the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 0 When the replay and each push order bell are won, if the internal winning combination is a normal replay, a pseudo special game state transition symbol that is a symbol corresponding to the pseudo bonus color type of the pseudo bonus state that is won is displayed on the reel display window 4 Push order navigation that can be displayed in the middle row (for example, when the pseudo bonus color type is pseudo bonus color type 1, “red-BAR-red BAR-red BAR” can be aligned in the middle row of the reel display window 4 “middle-right” -Left ") is executed, and if the internal winning combination is a push order bell, a push order navigation for winning the eight bell combination is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 51 (b), (d), 52 (a), and (c), the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 1 is: When each normal replay is won, the push order navigation that can display the symbol corresponding to the pseudo bonus color type of the pseudo bonus state won in each normal replay in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 is executed, and the push order bell It is configured not to execute push order navigation when winning a prize.

  As a result, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the pseudo bonus state, and when the sub control circuit 101 executes the pseudo bonus transition state process, if the effect gaming state is the effect gaming state 0, the push When the forward bell is won, the forward navigation is executed to win the 8-bell role, and the main control circuit 91 can shift the effect gaming state from the effect game state 0 to the effect game state 1. Further, if the pachislot machine 1 is the production game state 1, the main control circuit 91 changes the production game state from the production game state 1 to the production game state 2 by not performing the push order navigation of the push order bell. Can be prevented from being transferred to.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (d), the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game states 2 to 4 is the normal replay regardless of the type of the pseudo bonus color that is won. And, when the push order bell is won, the push order navigation is not executed.

  As a result, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the push order navigation when the effect gaming state is the effect gaming states 2 to 4 when the sub control circuit 101 executes the pseudo bonus transition state process. By not doing so, it is possible to cause the main control circuit 91 to shift the effect game state from the effect game states 2 to 4 to the effect game state 0 by winning a single bell combination when the pushing order bell is won.

  FIG. 52 (e) shows a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation that is selected regardless of the pseudo bonus color type and effect gaming state of the pseudo bonus state that is won when the value of the normal penalty counter (described later) is not zero. The lottery table is configured not to execute push order navigation when a normal replay and a push order bell are won.

<ART reference table>
The ART reference table shown in FIG. 53 is a table in which the contents of each effect in the AT state set in the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 are set.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the ART reference table, each AT winning number includes “ART success / failure” related to the success / failure of the AT state, and the gaming state is transferred to the first AT state after the second AT state ends. “Loop reference” relating to the loop rate as a continuation probability that is a probability, “ART set number” relating to the number of continuations that is the number of times that one set of AT states is continuously executed, and a special that will be described later Information relating to “the number of special mode 6 sets” relating to the number of times the special mode 6 is set as the special mode among the modes is associated. Further, the ART content shown in FIG. 53 indicates the content of information associated with each AT winning number.

  Here, when the sub-control circuit 101 wins each AT winning number by the ART lottery, the information related to the ART winning / nothing, loop reference, ART set number and special mode 6 set number associated with the corresponding AT winning number. Are each stored in a predetermined area. For example, ART success / failure is stored in the ART success / failure storage area, and the special mode 6 set number is stored in the special mode 6 stock counter.

  As shown in FIG. 53, since the AT winning number 1 is associated with “0” in which all of the ART success / failure, loop reference, ART set number, and special mode 6 set number are lost, the ART content is “ It's a “losing”.

  The AT winning numbers 2 to 6 are associated with “1”, which is the winning state of the AT state, as the ART success / failure, and are associated with “1” to “5” having different loop rates as loop references. , ART contents are “loop A” to “loop E”.

  Here, the loop references 1 to 5 are set to loop rates of 25%, 33%, 50%, 66%, and 80%, respectively, and are based on the selected loop rate after the end of the second AT state. Thus, by shifting the gaming state to the first AT state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to continue the AT state.

  The loop reference is stored in the loop reference stock table. Here, when the loop reference stock table wins the AT winning number associated with the loop references 1 to 5 by the ART lottery, the loop reference corresponding to the corresponding AT winning number is the loop reference stock table. The loop reference stored at the end and the loop reference stored at the top of the loop reference stock table is a table set as a loop rate to be referred to in each control process.

  Since the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are associated with “1” to “3” and “5” as the number of ART sets, respectively, the ART contents are “1set” to “3set” and “5set”. ing.

  Here, the ART set numbers “1” to “3” and “5” are associated with the number of sets in the AT state of 1 to 3 sets and 5 sets, respectively. Further, the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are associated with “0” which does not win the AT state as the ART winning / failing.

  For this reason, when the sub control circuit 101 wins the AT winning number associated with “1” as the ART winning or not and executes the AT state, the number of sets determined when winning the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 is determined. When the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are won to execute the AT state for the minute, the number of AT state sets corresponding to the number of ART sets is provided in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103 in the sub-control circuit 101. The set number is added to the loop stock table, and the set number is stocked.

  Since the AT winning numbers 11 and 12 are respectively associated with “1” and “2” as the number of special mode 6 sets, the ART contents are “special mode 6 1set” and “special mode 6 2set”. Yes.

  Here, the number of special mode 6 sets “1” and “2” are associated with the number of sets of the special mode 6 of 1, 2 sets, respectively.

  Since the AT winning numbers 13 to 21 have a plurality of contents each of the AT winning numbers 2 to 12 described above, the ART content is “1set + special mode” in accordance with the contents of each AT winning number 13 to 21. 6 1set ”,“ Loop D + 1set ”,“ Loop E + 1set ”,“ Loop D + 3set ”,“ Loop E + 3set ”,“ Loop D + Special Mode 6 1set ”,“ Loop E + Special Mode 6 1set ”,“ Loop D + Special Mode 6 2set ” “Loop E + special mode 6 2set”.

  Here, although the AT winning numbers 14 to 17 are associated with the loop rate and the number of sets in the AT state, they are associated with “0” that does not win the AT state as the ART success / failure. For this reason, when the sub control circuit 101 wins the AT winning number associated with “1” as the ART winning / failing and executes the AT state, the number of sets determined when winning the AT winning numbers 14 to 17 is determined. Whether or not to continue the AT state based on the loop rate determined when the AT winning numbers 14 to 17 are won after the execution of the determined number of AT states. Execute.

  In this way, the sub RAM 103 stocks the loop rate in the loop reference stock table and stocks the number of sets in the loop stock table.

  In the following description, “winning the ART contents” means winning the AT winning number having the corresponding ART contents.

<ART lottery table for normal bonus bonus>
The normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table as the specific effect state lottery table shown in each of FIGS. 54 to 56 is a pseudo-bonus type lottery in the normal medium processing shown in FIGS. 142 and 143. This table is referred to when the ART lottery is executed at the time of winning.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table is different from the normal time pseudo depending on the normal mode and the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. The ART lottery table is selected when the bonus is won. For example, if the normal mode is the normal mode 1 and the probability state is low, the normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table shown in FIG. 54A is selected.

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 54 to 56, in each normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table, each ART content is associated with a lottery value for each winning pseudo-bonus state. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 56A to 56C, the normal pseudo bonus winning lottery table selected when the probability state is extremely high is selected when the probability state is low or high. 54 and FIG. 55, the winning probability of the ART contents “Loop B” to “Loop E” is set higher than the normal lottery table at the time of the normal pseudo bonus state shown in FIGS. ing.

  Here, when each ART content is won, the sub-control circuit 101 refers to the ART reference table shown in FIG. 53 and associates the determined ART content with “1” corresponding to the AT state win. It is determined whether or not the AT state has been won. In the following description, when the ART lottery is executed, the sub control circuit 101 determines the ART content based on the lottery value defined in each table, and refers to the ART reference table to determine the determined ART content. It is determined whether or not the AT state is won by referring to the information related to the corresponding ART success / failure.

<ART lottery table during pseudo bonus winning during pseudo bonus winning>
57 is a table that is referred to when the ART lottery is executed when the pseudo bonus lottery during the pseudo bonus is won in the pseudo bonus transition state process shown in FIG. 148. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the ART bonus lottery table during pseudo bonus winning, a lottery value is associated with each ART content for each simulated bonus state.

<Art lottery table during pseudo bonus>
The pseudo-bonus ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 58 to 60 is a table that is referred to when the ART lottery is executed in the pseudo-bonus medium processing shown in FIGS. 150 and 151. .

  As shown in FIGS. 58 to 60, (a) and (b), different pseudo-bonus ART lottery tables are selected for the pseudo-bonus ART lottery table depending on whether the ART is successful or the pseudo-bonus state being executed. It is configured as follows. For example, in the state where the ART win is “0”, that is, the AT state is non-winning, and the pseudo bonus state is the first and second pseudo bonus states, ie, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect “red BAR−red BAR−red BAR” ”Or“ blue BAR−blue BAR−blue BAR ”is being executed, the pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table shown in FIG. 58A is selected.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIGS. 58 to 60, in each pseudo bonus ART lottery table, each ART content is associated with a lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in each of (a) of FIGS. 58 to 60, the pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table selected when the ART success / failure is “0” includes “common bell”, “weak cherry”, When “strong cherry”, “chance replay”, and “chance eye” are won, the lottery values of the ART contents “loop B” to “loop E” with the ART success / failure “1” are high. Further, as shown in each of FIGS. 58 to 60, each pseudo-bonus ART lottery table selected when the ART win is “1” has “common bell”, “weak cherry” as internal winning combinations. ”,“ Strong Cherry ”,“ Chance Replay ”and“ Chance Eye ”, the ART success / failure is“ 0 ”, and the lottery value of the ART content“ 1set ”that stocks one set of the AT state becomes high ing.

  58A to 60B, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 102 that executes various control processes in the sub control circuit 101 has the same color transition pattern as the pseudo bonus type. In the case of winning the pseudo bonus types 1 and 2 that can be won, the ART win / fail is associated with the AT state win more than in the case of winning the pseudo bonus types 3 and 4 in which a different color transition symbol can be won as the pseudo bonus type. It is structured to make it easy to win the AT winning number.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can provide a difference depending on the gameability because it can provide a difference in the winning probability of the AT state between the case of the same color transition symbol and the case of the different color transition symbol. be able to.

<ART Navi lottery table>
The ART navigation lottery tables shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are processed in the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, in the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, and in FIG. In the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state shown, it is a table that is referred to when pushing order navigation is determined when the pushing order bell is won.

  As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the ART navigation lottery table is configured so that different ART navigation lottery tables are selected depending on the effect game state managed by the main control circuit 91.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the ART navigation lottery table selected when the production game state is the production game state 2 to 4 is a push that wins an 8-bell combination when winning each push order bell. It is configured to perform forward navigation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the ART navigation lottery table selected when the production game state is the production game state 0 or 1 wins the winning of 8 bells when winning each push order bell. It is configured to execute push order navigation.

  As a result, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the sub control circuit 101 executes the AT state or the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state, if the staging gaming state is the staging gaming state 0, 1, the push order bell By performing push order navigation at the time of winning and winning the eight bell combination, the main control circuit 91 can shift the effect game state from effect game states 0, 1 to effect game states 2-4.

<Special table lottery table>
The special table lottery table shown in FIG. 62 is a table that is referred to when the special table is determined in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the change mode normal mode reference table lottery table, lottery values different in the set values “1” to “6” are associated with the winning probabilities of the respective tables.

  Here, the special table is composed of special tables 1-50. Each special table is a table composed of special table information 0 to 24. When a special mode table used for determining a special mode is determined, the special table and the special table information are Used. Each special table information is initialized in the first AT state start pre-processing when the special mode is not set, and the number of the currently selected special table information is selected by continuing the AT state. The special table information added with 1 is used in the next pre-processing for starting the first AT state.

<Special mode table reference table>
The special mode table reference table shown in FIG. 63 is a table that is referred to when determining the special mode table in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the special mode table is determined from the special table selected by the sub control circuit 101 and the special table information. For example, when the special table 1 is selected as the special table and the special table information 0 is selected as the special table information, the special mode table is determined as the special mode table 11.

  Here, the special mode table is a table composed of the special mode tables 1 to 17 and is used when the special mode is determined in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155.

<First AT state start special mode table ART lottery table>
The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B is used when the ART lottery is executed in the first AT state start pre-process shown in FIGS. 154 and 155. It is a table to be referenced.

  As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table is a first AT state game number lottery stored in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101. The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table, which is different depending on the flag selected in the state, is selected.

  The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIG. 64A is referred to when the normal state flag or the second AT state pseudo bonus state continuation time flag is selected as the AT state flag. Is done. Further, the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIG. 64B is referred to when the first AT state pseudo bonus continuation time flag is selected as the AT state flag.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), in the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table, the contents of the ART contents “lost”, “special mode 6 3set”, and “special mode 6 5set” are selected. A lottery value is associated with each probability for each of the special mode tables 1 to 17.

<Special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state>
The first AT state start special mode transition lottery table shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIG. 65 to FIG. 73 is a special mode in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIG. 154 and FIG. It is a table that is referred to when determining.

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 65 to 73, the special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state is the special mode selected by the sub control circuit 101 and the sub control circuit 101. The first AT state start special mode transition lottery table which is different depending on the flag selected in the special mode lottery state stored in the predetermined area is selected. For example, when the special mode 1 is selected as the special mode and the normal time flag is selected as the AT state flag, the first AT state start special mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 65A is selected. The

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 65 to 73, in the first AT state start special mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of each special mode differs in the special mode tables 1 to 17. A lottery value is associated.

<Pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state>
The first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIGS. 74A and 74B is referred to when the pseudo bonus type lottery is executed in the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 156 and 157. It is a table.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table is different from the first AT state pseudo bonus depending on the AT state probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. A lottery table is configured to be selected. For example, when the AT probability state is normal in the same color, the first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 74A is selected.

  In each first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the first AT-state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when the AT-probability state is highly likely to be of the same color is selected when the AT-probability state is normal of the same color. Compared with the pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state shown in 74 (a), the winning probability of the pseudo bonus color types 1 and 2 in which the same color symbol combination can be displayed in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is higher. In addition, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus types of the pseudo bonus color types 3 and 4 at which different symbol combinations can be displayed in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is set low.

<Pseudo bonus lottery table during second AT state>
The second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table shown in each of FIGS. 75 to 84 (a) and (b) executes the pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. It is a table that is referenced when doing so.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 to 84, each of the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery tables differs depending on the special mode selected by the sub-control circuit 101 and the AT probability state. The pseudo bonus lottery table is selected during the second AT state. For example, when the special mode is the special mode 1 and the probability state during AT is normal in the same color, the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIG. 75A is selected.

  In each second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIGS. 75 to 84 (b), the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when each AT probability state is highly likely to have the same color is used when the AT probability state is normal. Compared to the selected pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 75 to 84 (a), the pseudo bonus color types 1 and 2 that can display the same color symbol combination in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus types of the pseudo bonus color types 3 and 4 at which the winning probability of the bonus type is high and different symbol combinations can be displayed in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is set low.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 84 (b), the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when each AT probability state is highly likely to have the same color, Compared to the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 75 to 84 (a), which is sometimes selected, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 is set higher.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can easily shift to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state by the combination of replay symbols displayed in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state. This suggests that the player can be interested in the winning combination in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 76 (a), (b), 79 (a), (b), 80 (a), (b), 82 (a), (b), the special mode is special. The second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when mode 2 is selected is compared with the other second AT state pseudo bonus lottery tables as an internal winning combination and wins “chance replay”. In such a case, the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 77 (a), (b), 79 (a), (b), 81 (a), (b), 82 (a), (b), a special mode is provided as a special mode. The pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state selected when mode 3 is selected is compared with the pseudo bonus lottery table during the other second AT state and wins the “common bell” as an internal winning combination. In such a case, the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a), (b), 80 (a), (b), 81 (a), (b), 82 (a), (b), a special mode is provided. The second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when mode 4 is selected is compared with the other second AT state pseudo bonus lottery tables as “weak cherry” and “ When the “strong cherry” is won, the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 83 (a), (b), 84 (a), and (b), during the second AT state selected when the special modes 5 and 6 are selected as the special mode. The pseudo bonus lottery table is compared to the other bonus bonus lottery table during the second AT state when “chance replay”, “common bell”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry” are won as internal winning combinations. The winning probability for each pseudo bonus type is set high.

<ART lottery table when pseudo bonus is won during AT state>
85 and 86, the AT lottery table during the AT state pseudo bonus winning is shown in the first AT state process shown in FIGS. 156 and 157 and FIGS. 158 to 160. It is a table referred in the case of the ART lottery executed when winning in the pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state process.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, (a) and (b), the ART lottery table during the AT state pseudo bonus is determined according to the AT state being executed and the special mode selected for the secondary game circuit 101, respectively. The ART lottery table is selected when the pseudo bonus is won in different AT states.

  85 (a) and 86 (a), the ART lottery table during the AT state pseudo bonus win is referred to when the first AT state is executed, and when the special mode 6 is selected. FIG. 86 (a) is referred to. In addition, the AT lottery table during the AT state pseudo-bonus winning shown in FIG. 85 (b) and FIG. 86 (b) is referred to when the second AT state is executed, and the special mode 6 is selected. In that case, reference is made to FIG.

  85 and 86, in the ART lottery table during the AT state pseudo bonus winning, the ART contents “lost”, “1set”, “special mode 6 1set”, “loop” D + special mode 6 3set ”,“ loop E + special mode 6 3set ”,“ loop D + special mode 6 5set ”and“ loop E + special mode 6 5set ”winning probabilities correspond to lottery values for each winning bonus state It is attached.

<ART loop lottery table>
87 (a) to 87 (g), the ART loop lottery table changes the gaming state to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155. It is a table that is referred to when executing an ART loop lottery for lottering whether or not to continue the AT state by shifting.

  As shown in FIGS. 87A to 87G, the ART loop lottery table is configured such that different ART loop lottery tables are selected depending on the control information controlled by the sub-control circuit 101.

  The ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. 87 (a) is an ART loop lottery table selected when the conditions for selecting the ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 87 (b) to 87 (g) are not satisfied. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value for each loop rate determined by the ART lottery. For example, when the ART content won in the ART lottery is Loop A in which the AT state continues with a probability of 25%, it is configured to win a continuation or special continuation with a probability of 25%.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 (b) is an ART loop lottery table selected when an AT state is stocked in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 (c) is an ART loop lottery table selected when the special mode 6 is selected as the special mode. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 (d) is an ART loop lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state is selected as the loop lottery state. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

  In the ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 (e), the ART loop selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state is selected as the loop lottery state and special continuation is won in the previous ART loop lottery. It is a lottery table. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so that a special continuation is always won regardless of the ART content determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87F is an ART loop lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the third AT state is selected as the loop lottery state. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

  In the ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 (g), the ART loop selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state is selected as the loop lottery state and the special continuation is won in the previous ART loop lottery. It is a lottery table. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

<Special mode transition lottery table for special continuation>
The special continuation special mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 88 is a table that is referred to when the special mode is determined in the second AT state initial process shown in FIG. 161.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the special continuation special mode transition lottery table, the special mode is associated with different lottery values for each currently selected special mode. The lottery value is set so that the mode transition lottery shifts to the same special mode as the currently selected special mode or the special mode advantageous to the player as compared with the currently selected special mode.

<ART lottery table when special conditions are met>
89 is a table that is referred to when the ART lottery is executed in the second AT state end processing shown in FIG. 162.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a lottery value is associated with each ART content in the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied.

<Art lottery table when running a bonus bonus>
90 is a table that is referred to when the ART lottery is executed in the pseudo bonus state end time processing shown in FIGS. 152 and 153.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the ART bonus lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus extra state execution, the contents of each ART are respectively determined by the value of a pseudo bonus extra counter (described later) stored in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101. Different lottery values are associated with each other.

<Regular sign game number lottery table>
The normal-time precursor game number lottery tables shown in FIGS. 91 to 98 are tables that are referred to when determining the number of games in which the precursor state is executed in the normal medium processing shown in FIGS. 142 and 143.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 to 96, the normal sign game number lottery table shows whether or not the pseudo bonus state is true, whether or not the AT state is true when the pseudo bonus state is won, the normal mode and the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. Different normal time game number lottery tables are selected according to each. For example, when the pseudo bonus state is not won, the normal mode is the normal mode 1, and the probability state is low probability, the normal time precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 91A is selected. .

  In each normal sign game number lottery table, each sign game number, which is the number of times the sign state is executed, is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. 95 and 96, the normal sign game number lottery table selected when the probability state is extremely high is selected when the probability state is low or high. Compared with the normal sign game number lottery table shown in FIG. 2, the winning probability of each predictive game number with a large number of games is set higher.

  Here, the normal sign game number lottery tables shown in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c) and FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (d) are sub-controls when the value of the normal penalty counter (described later) is not zero. This table is referred to regardless of whether the probability state selected by the circuit 101 is low accuracy, high accuracy, or ultra high accuracy.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (d), the normal time precursor game number lottery table referred to when the value of the normal penalty counter is not 0 is in a pseudo bonus state. The normal sign game number lottery table which is different depending on whether or not the game is in the pseudo bonus state and whether or not the AT state is successful and the normal mode selected by the sub-control circuit 101 is selected.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c) and FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (d), the normal time precursor game number lottery table referred to when the value of the normal penalty counter is not 0 Regardless of the winning combination, lottery values are assigned so that “no sign” is always selected.

<First AT state game number lottery table>
The first AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 99 is the first AT state game number as the number of games in the first AT state in the first AT state start preprocessing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155. It is a table that is referred to when determining.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the first AT state game number random determination table, the sub-control circuit 101 selects each first AT state game number that is the number of times the first AT state is executed. A lottery value is associated with each AT state flag.

<The first AT state game number extra lottery table>
The first AT state game number extra lottery table shown in FIGS. 100A and 100B executes the extra lottery for adding the first AT state game number in the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 150 and 151. It is a table that is referenced when doing so.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), the first AT state number-of-games extra lottery table differs depending on whether or not the AT winning number for stocking the number of sets in the ART bonus lottery during the pseudo bonus is different. The lottery table is selected so that the number of state games is added.

  The AT lottery table during pseudo bonus winning during the AT state shown in FIG. 100A is referred to when the AT winning number for stocking the number of sets in the similar bonus ART lottery is not won. In addition, the first AT state game number extra lottery table shown in FIG. 100B is referred to when an AT winning number for stocking the number of sets in the similar bonus ART lottery is won.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), in the first AT state game number additional lottery table, the first AT state game number added is associated with a lottery value for each internal winning combination. If you win “Common Bell”, “Weak Cherry”, “Strong Cherry”, “Chance Replay” and “Chance Eye” as an internal winning combination, the number of games in the first AT state game is added. It is a lottery value to get.

<Second AT state game number lottery table>
The second AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 101 to FIG. 106 shows the second AT state game number as the number of games in the second AT state in the second AT state initial process shown in FIG. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 to 106, the second AT state game number lottery table is selected by the second AT state game number lottery table which is different depending on the AT continuation type selected by the sub-control circuit 101 and the special mode. It is configured to be. For example, when the AT continuation type is “no continuation” and any one of the special modes 1 to 5 is selected as the special mode, the second AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 101 is selected. .

  As shown in FIGS. 101 to 106, in the second AT state game number lottery table, each second AT state game number that is the number of times the second AT state is executed is determined by the ART lottery. Different lottery values are associated with each loop rate. As shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the second AT state game number random determination table selected when a plurality of special modes are selected is selected when one special mode is selected. As compared with the second AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 103, the winning probability of each second AT state game number having a large number of games is set higher.

<First pseudo bonus selection production announcement timing lottery table>
The first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table shown in each of FIGS. 107 and 108 is shown in FIG. 166 when the player selects the first pseudo bonus selection effect. It is a table that is referred to when determining at which notification timing it is determined whether or not to win the ART in the process of receiving a winning action command.

  107 (a) to 108 (c), the first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table has different first pseudo bonuses depending on the loop rate of the winning AT state. It is comprised so that the notification timing lottery table at the time of selection effect may be selected. For example, if the winning AT state loop rate is loop A, the first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table shown in FIG. 107 (b) is selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108 (a) to (c), in the first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table, the set value selected by the main control circuit 91 at each announcement timing. Different lottery values are associated with each other.

  Here, each of the first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery tables selected when the ART win / failure is won has a set value selected by the main control circuit 91 according to the announcement timing won as a result of the lottery. It is configured so that it can be suggested. For example, the notification timing 3 is configured to have a high probability of winning when the setting “1”, the setting “3”, and the setting “5” having the odd set values are selected.

<Second pseudo bonus selection production announcement timing lottery table>
The second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table shown in each of FIGS. 109 and 110 is shown in FIG. 166 when the player selects the second pseudo bonus selection effect. It is a table that is referred to when determining at which notification timing it is determined whether or not to win the ART in the process of receiving a winning action command.

  As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the second pseudo bonus selection effect time announcement timing lottery table is different depending on the set value selected by the main control circuit 91. A pseudo-bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table is selected. For example, when the setting value selected by the main control circuit 91 is “1”, the second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table shown in FIG. 109A is selected.

  As shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, in the second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table, each announcement timing is selected according to the loop rate of the winning AT state. Different lottery values are associated with each set value.

  Here, each second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table is configured to indicate which loop rate of the winning AT state is based on the announcement timing won as a result of lottery. For example, the notification timing 4 is configured to win when the loop C to the loop E are selected as the loop rate.

<End effect lottery table when third pseudo bonus selection effect is executed>
When the player selects the third pseudo bonus selection effect, the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end lottery table shown in FIG. 111 is simulated in the pseudo bonus end time processing shown in FIGS. 152 and 153. It is a table referred when determining the effect which alert | reports that the bonus state was complete | finished.

  As shown in FIG. 111, end effect numbers 1 to 37 are associated with each end effect for informing that the pseudo bonus state has ended. Further, as shown in FIG. 111, in the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery table, the normal mode selected in the next game and the third pseudo bonus selection effect are selected for each end effect. In the ART lottery executed when the pseudo bonus state is won, when the AT state is won, a different lottery value is associated with the loop rate of the corresponding AT state.

  Here, in the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery table, either the normal mode selected in the next game or the loop rate of the AT state being won is determined by the end effect won as a result of the lottery. It is configured to suggest.

  The end effect is composed of a normal end effect and first to third special end effects, and the contents of the effects are different from each other. Each end effect is composed of nine types of end effects: four types of end effects that suggest the normal mode selected in the next game, and five types of end effects that indicate the loop rate of the winning AT state. Each is composed.

  For example, the normal end effect is a normal end effect 1 to 4 indicating a normal mode selected in the next game, a normal end effect AT winning time 1 to 5 indicating a loop rate of the winning AT state, 9 types of end effects.

  Here, the normal end effects 1 and 2 can be won when any of the normal modes 1 to 5 is selected in the next game. Further, the normal end effect 3 can be won when the normal modes 3 to 5 are selected in the next game. The normal end effect 4 can be won when the normal modes 4 and 5 are selected in the next game.

  That is, when the normal end effect 4 is executed as the end effect, the player is suggested to win the AT state when the pseudo bonus state is won in the next and subsequent games. .

[Main game state transition]
<Transition of RT gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 112, in the pachislot machine 1, the main game state on the main control side controlled by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) is the general game state (RT0 game state), RT1 game state, and MB. There is a gaming state.

  The RT0 gaming state is an initial state when the pachislot machine 1 is shipped. The main gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state when the MB gaming state ends. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which a winning number is drawn based on the internal gaming state lottery table (see FIG. 22), and is a replay low-probability state in which the winning probability of a normal replay as a re-gamer is low.

  The main gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state when the internal winning combination “F_MB” (winning number 51) is won during the RT0 gaming state.

  The RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which a winning number is determined based on the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 23), and is a replay high probability state in which the winning probability of normal replay is higher than the RT0 gaming state.

  Here, the RT1 gaming state is not an RT managed by the number of games, but continues unless the action symbol in the MB gaming state wins a prize. In that sense, the RT1 gaming state is infinite RT.

  The main gaming state shifts to the MB gaming state when the operation pattern (winning combination “C_MB1, 2”) in the MB gaming state wins during the RT1 gaming state.

  The MB gaming state is a gaming state in which all the small roles (see FIGS. 14 to 17) win internally, and when the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number of payouts (30 in this embodiment). To finish.

  Although details will be described later, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the internal winning combination “F_MB” with a high probability in the RT0 gaming state, and wins the action pattern in the MB gaming state in the RT1 gaming state. Since it is difficult, the main gaming state is approximately the RT1 gaming state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, on the condition that “F_MB” as the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main game state is shifted to the bonus flag carry-over state and the operation pattern related to MB On the condition that the combination (also referred to as an operating combination) is displayed on a winning line to be described later, the main gaming state is shifted from the bonus flag carryover state to the MB gaming state as the bonus gaming state.

  The transition from the main game state to the bonus flag carry-over state or the MB game state is performed by the main CPU 93 (see FIG. 8).

  Note that in the MB gaming state of the present embodiment, the number of medals (BET number) and the number of payouts are set in order to play a unit game so that medals given to the player do not increase. . For example, when two sheets are inserted (two sheets BET), two medals are paid out, so that medals given to the player can be prevented from increasing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state is set while the main gaming state is in the above-described bonus flag carry-over state. Thus, by setting the bonus flag carry-over state to the RT1 gaming state, the number of RT gaming states managed by the main control circuit 91 can be effectively reduced to one. The amount of data handled can be reduced, and the load on the main control circuit 91 can be greatly reduced by the pseudo bonus game.

[Main control processing]
The main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 changes the effect game state on the main control side in a pseudo manner according to the transition diagram shown in FIG. 113, and executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Changes in production gaming status>
As shown in FIG. 113, the present pachislot machine 1 has a normal state (effect game state 0), a preparation state (effect game state 1), and a specific effect state (effect game state 0) that are simulated in the main CPU 93. There are an ART state (effect game state 2) that is an AT state), a pseudo bonus state (effect game state 3) that is a pseudo special game state, and a special (premium) pseudo bonus state (effect game state 4).

  The transition of the effect game states 0 to 4 on the main control side is performed in order to execute a game lock effect that temporarily locks the progress of the game at the start and end of the pseudo bonus.

  In the effect game state 0, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 1 on the condition that the combination of the operation symbols related to the above-mentioned eight bells is displayed on the winning line. In the effect game state 0, the effect game state transitions to the effect game state 3 on condition that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in a specific pressing order when the above-described normal replay is won.

  In the production game state 1, when the above-described push order bell is won, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in the push order in which the eight-bell combination cannot be won, and the eight-bell combination is not displayed. In the case of “spilling” (when one medal is acquired), the production gaming state shifts to the production gaming state 0. In the effect game state 1, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 2 on the condition that the combination of the operation symbols related to the above-mentioned eight bells is displayed on the winning line. In the effect game state 1, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 3 on condition that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in a specific pressing order when the above-described normal replay is won. In the effect game state 1, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 4 on condition that the combination of the operation symbols related to the above-mentioned premium flag (F_Premier Lip) is displayed on the winning line.

  In the production game state 2, when the pushing order bell is won, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pushed in the pushing order in which the eight bell combination cannot be won, and the eight bell combination is not displayed. ”(When one medal is acquired), the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 0.

  In the effect game state 3, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 4 on condition that the combination of the operation symbols related to the above-mentioned premium flag (F_Premier Lip) is displayed on the winning line.

  In production gaming states 3 and 4, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pushed in the push order in which the eight-bell role cannot be won when the push-order bell is won, and the eight-bell role is not displayed. In the case of “spilling” (when one medal is acquired), the production gaming state shifts to the production gaming state 0. In the effect game states 3 and 4, the number of times (count value) of a pseudo bonus counter (not shown) is “8”, that is, the effect game state is changed to the effect game by winning 8 times for the 8 bells. Transition to state 2.

  Here, the main control circuit 91 executes the game lock effect at the start of the pseudo bonus by changing the effect game states 0 to 4 on condition that the winning of the specific winning combination and the specific pushing order are executed. In addition, it is possible to estimate a change in the secondary gaming state on the secondary control side.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the main control process. The main control process described below starts when the pachislot machine 1 is powered on.

  First, when power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 executes the power-on process shown in FIG. 115 (S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or the setting has been changed appropriately, and an initialization process is executed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an initialization process at the end of one game (one game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. As a result of this initialization processing, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area, the display combination storing area, etc. of the main RAM 95 is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 116 (S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process for detecting a medal inserted by the player and a process for detecting a start operation are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts three random number values (random number values 1 to 3) and stores them in a random number storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S13).

  Here, the random value 1 is a value used for the internal lottery process, and is extracted from 0 to 65535 in the present embodiment. The random numbers 2 and 3 are values used for other lottery processing, and are extracted from 0 to 65535 and 0 to 255, respectively, in the present embodiment.

  The main CPU 93 does not need to extract the random number values 2 and 3 in step S13, and may extract the random number values 2 and 3 when they are used.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 117 (S14). The main CPU 93 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop initial setting process shown in FIG. 119 (S15). By this reel stop initial setting process, each piece of information (for example, stop table number) related to the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination). Is done.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a game start effect control process shown in FIG. 120 (S16). In the game start time effect control process, the main CPU 93 starts a privilege granting game on condition that the premier role has been won internally. Here, the privilege granting game is a game that is started in accordance with a notification effect process for notifying the player that the premier role has been internally won, and the player performs a predetermined input operation within a predetermined time. By doing, it means a game in which a special privilege is given to the player. Details thereof will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a wait process (S17). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous game (start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. It will be in a waiting state until it does. The predetermined time in the wait process, that is, the wait time is set to 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 121 to rotate all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S18). This reel rotation start process is executed by the interrupt process (reel control process) shown in FIG. This interrupt process is a process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 ms).

  By this interruption process, the driving of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started. Thereafter, the driving of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is controlled by this interruption process, and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are accelerated until the rotation reaches a constant speed (so-called normal acceleration process).

  Further, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant speed, this interruption process controls the driving of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate at a constant speed. To be maintained.

  In the reel rotation start process, a reel effect (lock effect) such as a reel lock effect, which will be described later, can also be performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 ( S19).

  By receiving this reel rotation start command data, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority storage process shown in FIG. 122 (S20). In this pull-in priority storage process, a pull-in priority table selection process shown in FIG. 123 is executed, and the pull-in priority of all symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. That is, in the pull-in priority storage process, stop information is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area for each symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R that is rotating based on the internal winning combination.

  For example, for each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, when the corresponding symbol is permitted to stop, the drawing priority data is stored in the drawing priority data storage area based on the drawing priority table, When stop is not permitted (for example, when a winning combination is won), data indicating prohibition of stop is stored in the draw priority data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop control process shown in FIG. 125 (S21). By this process, the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a winning search process (S22). In this winning search process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the winning line and the symbol combination table are collated to determine the symbol combination displayed on the winning line. The

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 32) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 21) are collated, and the collation result is displayed in the display combination storage area (FIG. 31). Stored).

  More specifically, the data in the symbol code storage area is copied as it is as the data in the display combination storage area. At that time, the payout number is obtained by referring to the symbol combination table. The combination of symbols displayed on the reel display window 4 is specified by stopping all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by the winning search process.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes payout of the number of medals according to the displayed symbol combination based on the result of the winning search process (S23). Along with this medal payout process, control of a hopper drive circuit (not shown) and update of the credit number are performed based on the payout number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates winning action command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated winning action command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S24). . The winning operation command data represents, for example, the type of display combination, a flag related to locking, etc., the number of medals to be paid out, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end check process shown in FIG. 127 (S25). By this bonus end check process, a process for ending the operation of the MB gaming state is executed when a condition for ending the MB gaming state is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 128 (S26). By this bonus operation check processing, processing for operating the MB gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed by the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.

  After executing the process of step S26, the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S11. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 executes a pseudo bonus executed when the effect gaming state transitions from the effect gaming state 1 to the effect gaming state 3 between the bonus end check process and the bonus operation check process. Perform a start lock. Here, the pseudo-bonus start lock is a game lock effect that is executed in the effect game state 1 when the normal replay is internally won and the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 19L.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether backup is normal (S40). In this determination process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or not by error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores the set value of the pachislot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value when the power is turned off in the main RAM 95 as backup data, and the determination process when the power is turned on (S40). , The set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95 are read out.

  Then, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read setting value and the like with the checksum value that has been backed up, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison results match.

  When determining that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up setting values and the like (S41). As a result, when the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set.

  After executing the process of step S41 or when determining in step S40 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 turns on the setting change switch 53b provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1. Whether or not (S42).

  Here, if it is determined that the setting change switch 53b is on (YES), the main CPU 93 executes initialization processing at the time of setting change (S43).

  In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 95 are cleared and the set value is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated initialization command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S44). . The initialization command data represents, for example, whether or not a set value has been changed, a set value, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a setting value changing process (S45). In this setting value changing process, the setting value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and when the reset switch is operated subsequently, the selected setting value is confirmed. . In this manner, the main CPU 93 changes the set value indicating the degree of advantage for the player.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch 53b is in the on state (S46), and repeatedly executes the process of step S46 until a determination result that is not in the on state is obtained.

  If a determination result indicating that the setting change switch 53b is not in the ON state is obtained (NO), the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and generates The initialization command data thus stored is stored in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S47), and the power-on process is terminated.

  In step S42, when determining that the setting change switch 53b is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S48).

  Here, if it is determined that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 restores the state of the pachislot machine 1 to the state before the power is cut off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 95 ( S49), the power-on process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S48 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 executes power-on error processing (S50). In power-on error processing, the main CPU 93 displays an error display or the like indicating that the backup is not normal.

  Note that the main CPU 93 does not cancel the error state by operating the setting change button (reset button) 53e or the stop switch 53d in an error state where the backup is not normal (backup error). The error state is canceled only when the operation is performed.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S60). When a replay role is won in the previous unit game, medals are automatically inserted in the current unit game. That is, in the determination process in step S60, it may be determined whether or not a replay combination has been won in the previous unit game.

  In step S60, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 93 executes an automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop switch 53d is set to ON (S62). Specifically, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not the stop switch 53d is set on based on on / off information of the stop switch 53d input via the power supply board 53f.

  In the present embodiment, even when the medal automatic insertion process (S61) is performed after winning the replay role in the previous unit game, the stop switch 53d is set to ON (YES). Performs a process that allows the player to additionally insert medals. Therefore, when the main CPU 93 determines that the stop switch 53d is set to ON (YES), as described below, the condition is that the number of credits is not more than the maximum value (NO in S63). Then, a process of accepting additional insertion of medals is performed (S64).

  When the process of accepting additional insertion of medals (S64) is performed, even if the automatic insertion process (S61) is performed, the player is permitted to insert medals, and the main CPU 93 Processing to update the value of the credit counter in the main RAM 95 is performed.

  If it is determined in step S62 that the stop switch 53d is set to ON (YES), or if it is determined in step S60 that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), the main CPU 93 determines the credited medal. It is determined whether or not the number of sheets is the maximum value (S63). Specifically, the main CPU 93 checks whether the value of the credit counter is “50”.

  In step S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credited medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 93 permits acceptance of medals (S64). For example, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid of a selector (not shown) to form a path so that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 passes through the selector. With this process, it is possible to add medals at the time of replay winning (credit).

  After the process of step S64 is executed, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S65). In the present embodiment, three are set when the main gaming state is a gaming state other than the MB gaming state, and two are set when the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S66).

  If it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a medal insertion check process for checking the number of inserted medals (S67). In this medal insertion check process, the value of the insertion number counter is updated according to the number of checked medals.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes medal insertion command transmission processing (S68), and generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101. Then, the generated medal insertion command data is stored in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command data represents, for example, the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the inserted number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is a game start possible number and determines whether or not the number of credited medals is a maximum value (S69). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 checks that the number of inserted games is 3 when the main gaming state is the non-MB gaming state, 2 when the main gaming state is the MB gaming state, and the credit is 50.

  If it is determined in step S69 that the number of inserted medals is the game start possible number and the number of credits is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 93 prohibits acceptance of medals (S70). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a path for allowing the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to be discharged from the medal payout slot 32 without driving the solenoid of the selector.

  After executing the processing in step S70, or in step S69, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the number at which a game can be started and the number of credits is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 93 Then, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the game (S71).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3 when the main gaming state is the non-MB gaming state and 2 when the main gaming state is the MB gaming state. That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of medals inserted is a number that can start a unit game according to the gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S71 that the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the unit game (YES), or if it is determined in step S66 that acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), or in step S63 If it is determined that the number of credits is the maximum value (YES), or if it is determined in step S62 that the stop switch 53d is not set to ON (NO), the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S72).

  Here, when it is determined that the start switch 79 is not turned on (NO), or when it is determined in step S71 that the number of inserted medals is not the number that can start the unit game (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of step S66. Execute.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start switch 79 is on (YES), the main CPU 93 clears the automatic input request (S73).

  After the process of step S73 is executed, the main CPU 93 prohibits the reception of medals (S74) and ends the medal reception / start check process.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (S80). This determination process is executed based on whether or not bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area corresponding to the MB gaming state is “1” with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 36).

  That is, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “1”, it is determined that the main game state is the MB game state, and when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “0”. It is determined that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state.

  Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the MB operating process (S81). In the MB operating process, the bits corresponding to all the small combinations in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 31) are updated to “1”. When the process during MB operation is executed, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S80 that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the main gaming state (S82).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 22) when the main gaming state is the general gaming state, and when the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. Sets the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 23).

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains the random value 1 stored in the random value storage area (S83).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S82, and the lottery value associated with each winning number (1 to 51 in the present embodiment) of the corresponding setting value. Are obtained one by one, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random value 1 (S84). That is, the main CPU 93 collates the internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the subtraction result obtained in step S84 is smaller than 0 (S85). Here, if the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is not smaller than 0 (NO), that is, if it is determined that so-called borrowing is not performed, the main CPU 93 updates the random number 1 and the winning number (S86). ).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers in the internal lottery table being used have been checked (S87). If it is determined that all winning numbers have not been checked (NO) Then, the process of step S84 is executed.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that all winning numbers have been checked (YES), it sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S88).

  In the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is set so that the subtraction result does not necessarily become 0 or more when the main CPU 93 finishes checking all winning numbers. Never executed.

  In step S85, if the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is smaller than 0 (YES), that is, if it is determined that so-called borrowing has been performed, the winning number is referred to the set internal lottery table. The value of the data pointer for the small part / replay and the value of the data pointer for the bonus are obtained from (S89).

  After executing the processing of step S88 or step S89, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12) and determines the internal winning combination based on the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer. A combination is acquired (S90).

  In the process of step S90, the internal winning combination determining table corresponding to the value of the small combination / replay data pointer acquired in the process of step S88 or step S89 is referred to the internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay. The value is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S90 in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 30) (S91). In the process of step S91, the data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S90 is stored in the internal winning combination storing area (storage areas 0 to 6).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 35) is 0 (S92). In this embodiment, in this determination process, it is determined whether or not “F_MB” is carried over.

  In step S92, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), it refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 13) and determines the value of the bonus data pointer. An internal winning combination is acquired based on (S93).

  In the process of step S93, the bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and the data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of step S88 or step S89 is determined.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S93 in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 35) (S94). In the process of step S94, when “F_MB” is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S93, bit 0 corresponding to “F_MB” of the carryover storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 35) is 0 (S95). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not bit 0 corresponding to “F_MB” in the carryover storage area is set to “1” in step S94.

  If it is determined in step S95 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 sets bit 2 corresponding to “RT1 gaming state” in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 36) to “ 1 ”(S96). By the process of step S96, the main gaming state becomes the RT1 gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S92 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), if it is determined in step S95 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), or the process of step S96 is executed. After that, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S97).

  In the process of step S97, the data value of the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 30) is updated based on the type of internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 35).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel effect lottery process shown in FIG. 118 (S98). In the reel effect lottery process, the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing related to the reel rotation effect pattern of the reel and lottery processing related to the number of release operations (input operations) performed by the player on the condition that the premier role is won internally. And execute. Then, the main CPU 93 creates start command data based on the determined spinning effect pattern and the determined number of release operations, and stores the data in the communication data storage area. After executing the process of step S98 or after executing the process of step S81, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process.

<Reel production lottery processing>
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the reel effect lottery processing executed in step S98 of the internal lottery processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the premier role has been won (S100). Here, the premier combination means a case where the internal winning combination is a premier flag, and the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the premier flag is internally winning based on the value of the data pointer for the small combination / replay. Make a decision.

  If the premier combination is not won in the process of step S100 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect lottery process. On the other hand, when winning the premier role in the process of step S100 (YES), the main CPU 93 performs lottery effect pattern lottery (S101). In the lottery process of the rotating effect pattern, one of the rotating effect pattern 1 to the rotating effect pattern 4 is determined by lottery. Here, the winning probabilities of the revolving effect pattern 1 to the revolving effect pattern 4 are all set equal to 25%, and based on this winning probability, the main CPU 93 starts from the revolving effect effect pattern 1 to the revolving effect. Any lottery of pattern 4 is performed.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 29, the waiting time is set in each of the spinning effect production patterns 1 to 4, as shown in FIG. This wait time corresponds to the time (game time) until the end of the game in the privilege grant game. The main CPU 93 that executes the lottery process of the spinning effect pattern constitutes a game time determination unit.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the rotation effect pattern has been determined (S102). When the spinning effect pattern is not determined in the process of step S102 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect lottery process. On the other hand, when the rotation effect pattern is determined in the process of step S102 (YES), the main CPU 93 stores the determined rotation effect pattern in the rotation effect storage area of the main RAM 95 (S103). ).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery of the release counter (S104). The main CPU 93 refers to the release counter lottery table shown in FIG. 29, and is any of 10, 20, 30 or 40 times as the value of the release counter based on the rotation effect pattern determined in step S101. A lottery of the value of is performed. The lottery of the release counter is performed based on the random number value generated in step S13 of the main control process shown in FIG. The main CPU 93 stores the determined release counter value in the release counter storage area of the main RAM 95. The main CPU 93 that executes the lottery process of the release counter constitutes the operation number determination means. Further, the value of the release counter corresponds to the number of input operations necessary to end the privilege granting game.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 based on the determined rotation effect pattern and the value of the release counter, and the generated start command data is stored in the main RAM 95. Stored in the allocated communication data storage area. The start command data includes not only the spinning effect pattern and the release counter value, but also, for example, the game state flag type, the bonus end number counter value, the internal winning combination type, the lock type flag type, and the effect It is generated based on the value of the timer. The generation of the start command data by the main CPU 93 is appropriately performed according to various processes as well as the reel effect lottery process.

  When the release counter lottery (S104) is performed and the start command data generation process is performed, when the rotation effect pattern is not determined in the process of step S102 (NO), or step S100 In this process, when the premier combination is not won internally (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect lottery process.

  The main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (one game) in the main control process shown in FIG. 114 (S11). Since the data in the spinning effect storage area is also cleared along with this initialization process, the determination of the spinning effect pattern is not made in the process of step S102 (NO), or in the process of step S100. When the premier combination is not won (NO), the data of the spinning effect pattern 0 is stored in the spinning effect storage area.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the reel stop initial setting process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (S120). If it is determined that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 is the same as the small role / replay data pointer obtained in the process of step S89 of the internal lottery process shown in FIG. Is set as the rotation stop number (S121).

  In the process of step S120, when it is determined that the main game state is the MB game state (YES), or after executing the process of step S121, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 26). Each information is acquired based on the rotation stop number (S122).

  In the process of step S122, the main CPU 93, for example, the number of the stop table used at the time of the first to third stop operations and the information necessary for performing the control change in the control change process (that is, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R). Are stopped in a specific order, and when stopped or pressed at a specific position, information used to reselect the stop table is acquired.

  The stop table stores information on the number of sliding pieces for the pressed position, either directly or indirectly. Using this information, there is a limit that does not cause a disadvantage to the player and does not cause erroneous winnings. Are configured to stop at a stop position intended by the developer.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in each storage area of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 32) (S123), stores 3 in the stop button non-operating counter (S124), and sets the reel stop initial setting. The process ends.

<Game control process at start of game>
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the game start effect control process executed in step S16 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  The main CPU 93 determines whether or not the rotation effect pattern is 1 or more (S140). The main CPU 93 reads the rotation effect pattern from the rotation effect storage area, and determines whether the rotation effect pattern corresponds to any one of “1” to “4”. In the process of step S140, when the rotation effect pattern is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game start effect control process.

  Here, the case where the rotation effect pattern is 0 corresponds to the case where the rotation effect pattern is not 1 or more. In the reel effect lottery process shown in FIG. 118, when the premier role is not won (NO in S100), the rotation effect pattern lottery (S101) is not performed, and thus the times recorded in the rotation effect storage area. The dynamic effect pattern becomes the value set in the initial setting process (step S11 of the main control process shown in FIG. 114), that is, the rotation effect pattern “0”. As described above, when the premier role is not won internally, the bonus start game is not started, and the game start effect control process is ended.

  In the process of step S140, when the rotation effect pattern is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the wait time set in the rotation effect pattern (S141). The wait time is set in advance corresponding to the rotation effect pattern 1 to the rotation effect pattern 4 as shown in the release counter lottery table of FIG. Specifically, in the case of the rotation effect pattern 1, a wait time of 10 seconds is set, in the case of the rotation effect pattern 2, a wait time of 15 seconds is set, and in the case of the rotation effect pattern 3, A wait time of 20 seconds is set. In the case of the rotation effect pattern 4, a wait time of 25 seconds is set. The main CPU 93 starts measuring the passage of time after the wait time is set in step S141.

  Next, the main CPU 93 starts the movable control of the reel based on the set rotation effect pattern (S142). The reel movement control is set in advance based on the rotation effect pattern, and is continued until the wait time set in step S141 becomes zero. Similarly, various effect displays are performed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by the sub control circuit 101 until the set wait time becomes zero.

  The reel movement control performed by the main CPU 93 in step S142 is different from the reel normal acceleration process in step S130 of FIG. 121 (reel rotation start process) described later. In the reel movable control in step S142, for example, the player can perform normal acceleration processing by changing the number of rotations by rotating the reels at an accelerated or reduced speed, or by maintaining the reel rotation stopped state. Process that is recognized as different. By performing the reel movement control in this way, the player can recognize that the reel is rotating differently from the rotation of the reel in a general game (normal acceleration processing). For this reason, the player can recognize that the premier combination has been won internally even from the rotation state of the reels.

  Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the wait time has elapsed 5 seconds (S143). If it is determined in step S143 that 5 seconds have not elapsed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process in step S143 to repeatedly check the wait time until 5 seconds have elapsed. Until the wait time elapses, the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 executes a notification effect informing the liquid crystal display device 11 that the premier role has been won internally. Further, the sub CPU 102 performs a countdown display with a wait time of 5 seconds on the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the sub CPU 102 can quickly terminate the notification effect by performing a release operation (input operation) a predetermined number of times with respect to the liquid crystal display device 11 within a predetermined time, and performs a game advantageous to the player. Notification that a privilege that allows the user to be granted is given. The notification effect processing by the sub CPU 102 allows the player to surely recognize that the player has won the premier role, and to know that the bonus game will start with the internal winning of the premier role. It becomes.

  In the process of step S143, when the wait time has elapsed 5 seconds (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a release operation has been accepted (S144). In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MAXBET button 22b is pressed based on the BET switch 77. The sub CPU 102 can display the operation method of the release operation, the number of times the release operation has been received, and the like on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the wait time has elapsed for 5 seconds.

  When the release operation is accepted in the process of step S144 (YES), the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the value of the release counter stored in the release counter storage area (S145). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the release counter stored in the release counter storage area is 0 (S146).

  In the process of step S146, when the value of the release counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 transmits a release signal for ending the notification effect process and the privilege granting game to the sub control circuit 101 (S147). . More specifically, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 based on the release signal, and the generated start command data is assigned to a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. To store. Then, by the interrupt process of the main CPU 93, the start command data stored in the communication data storage area is sent to the sub CPU 102, and a release signal is transmitted. In this way, the main CPU 93 that determines whether or not the value of the release counter is 0 and transmits a release signal to the sub CPU 102 when the value of the release counter is 0 constitutes release operation completion determination means.

  After performing the release signal transmission process (S147), the main CPU 93 performs a process of changing the wait time to 0 (S148).

  Then, the main CPU 93 does not accept the release operation in the process of step S144 (NO), if the value of the release counter is not 0 in the process of step S146 (NO), and sets the wait time to 0. When updated (S148), it is determined whether the wait time is 0 (S149). In the process of step S149, when the wait time is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes again the process (S144) for determining whether the release operation has been accepted. On the other hand, when the wait time is 0 in the process of step S149 (YES), the main CPU 93 stores 0 as a rotation effect pattern in the spinning effect storage area (S150). Thus, by storing the rotation effect pattern 0 in the spinning effect storage area, the main CPU 93 can perform the normal acceleration processing (S130) of the reel in the reel rotation start processing of FIG. 121 described later. Become.

  After storing the turning effect pattern 0 in the turning effect storage area (S150), or when determining that the turning effect pattern is not 1 or more in the process of step S140 (NO), the main CPU 93 starts the game. The effect control process ends.

  As described above, in the game start effect process, when the spinning effect pattern is 1 or more, the liquid crystal display device 11 is informed that the premier role has been won internally, and the reel has a predetermined spinning effect. The drum is controlled by the pattern. For this reason, the player can recognize that the premier combination is won internally and that the premier combination can be won by a reel stop operation. At the same time, the player can know that the privilege granting game is started with the start of the notification effect process.

  Furthermore, in the privilege granting game, not only can the notification effect be shortened simply by the player actively performing the release operation, but also a game advantageous to the player (specifically, as will be described later) It is possible to increase the number of times of ART games). For this reason, the player can actively participate in the privilege-giving game by performing the release operation even during the informing effect regarding the internal winning of the premier role, and suppresses the decrease in interest associated with the informing effect. It becomes possible to do.

  In addition, when the player actively performs the release operation, it is possible to play a game advantageous to the player, so that the privilege granting game performed during the notification effect is felt as a special game. For this reason, it is possible to increase the player's curiosity and long-awaited feeling with respect to the privilege granting game, and also to increase the interest and attention to the notification effect performed in the privilege granting game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored due to the notification effect, and it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation and excitement with respect to the notification effect, which is a premise for starting the privilege-giving game.

<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start process executed in step S18 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  The main CPU 93 executes normal acceleration processing (S130). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes a normal acceleration process for simultaneously starting the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. More specifically, the main CPU 93 reads the rotation effect pattern from the rotation effect storage area, and determines whether or not the rotation effect pattern is “0”. When the rotation effect pattern is “0”, each reel is rotated to a predetermined rotation speed, and after reaching the predetermined rotation speed, the reel is maintained at the predetermined rotation speed. When the rotation effect pattern is not “0”, the main CPU 93 displays an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 and executes error processing for interrupting the game. After executing the normal acceleration process (S130), the main CPU 93 ends the reel rotation start process.

<Retrieve priority storage process>
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the pull-in priority storage process executed in step S20 of the main control process shown in FIG. 114 and step S224 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S170).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a search target reel determination process for determining a search target reel (S171). In this process, among the rotating reels, for example, one reel on the left side is determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority table selection process shown in FIG. 123 (S172). In this pull-in priority table selection process, one pull-in priority table number is selected from the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 28).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets 21 (the number of symbols on each reel) to the number of symbol checks stored in the main RAM 95, and sets 0 to the search symbol position (S173).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a symbol code storage process shown in FIG. 124 (S174). In the symbol code storage process, a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 31) based on the acquired symbol code and the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 32) (S175).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S176). This pull-in priority data acquisition processing is performed in step S172 for a combination whose corresponding bit is 1 in the display combination storing area and whose corresponding bit is 1 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 30). With reference to the information of the selected pull-in priority table number, pull-in priority data is acquired.

  In the drawing priority order data acquisition process, “stop prohibition” (000H) is set for the symbol positions that are erroneously won when stopped, and no internal winnings are made. For the symbol position, “stop possible” (00EH) is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired drawing priority data in a drawing priority data storage area corresponding to the search target reel (S177).

  Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks, and adds 1 to the retrieved symbol position (S178).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S179). Here, when it is determined that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S174.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of symbol checks is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a search for the number of searches has been performed (S180). If it is determined that the search for the number of times of search has been executed (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the search for the number of times of search has not been executed (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S171.

<Pull-in priority table selection processing>
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority table selection process executed in step S172 of the pull-in priority storage process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S190). If it is determined that the pull-in priority table selection data is set (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 34) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 33). Then, the drawing priority table number corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data is set from the drawing priority table selection table (see FIG. 27) (S191), and the drawing priority table selection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pull-in priority table selection data is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority table corresponding to the pull-in priority table number (S192), and the pull-in priority table The selection process ends.

<Design code storage processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the symbol code storing process executed in step S174 of the drawing priority order storing process shown in FIG. 122 and step S220 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 125.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S200). In the present embodiment, one effective line (medium-medium-medium) is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the symbol position data for checking the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S201). In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of the left reel 3L, the middle symbol position is set as the symbol position data for checking.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the symbol position data for check (S202), and ends the symbol code storage process.

<Reel stop control process>
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control process executed in step S21 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S210). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch of the stop switch substrate 80. When the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S210.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the depression order storage area (see FIG. 34) and the operation stop button storage area (FIG. 33) according to the pressed stop button. Reference) is updated (S211).

  Here, the main CPU 93 stores the types of operation stop buttons corresponding to the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation in the press order storage area (see FIG. 34), and the press order storage area. , It is possible to determine the pressing order of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S212), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S213), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S213). S214). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when a stop operation is detected by the stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S215). This sliding piece number determining process is a process of determining the number of sliding pieces defined at the stop start position according to the stop table selection data group selected based on the internal winning combination from the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 26). It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a priority pull-in control process shown in FIG. 126 (S216). This priority pull-in control processing is performed so that the drawing priority data of the number of sliding symbols acquired in step S215 stops at the symbol position corresponding to higher drawing priority data within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. This is a process of correcting the number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S217). . The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces determination data (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position of the search target reel based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 95 (S218). The scheduled stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position where the reel rotation stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position as a search symbol position (S219).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a symbol code storage process (see FIG. 124) (S220). Here, the bit of the combination (design combination) that can be displayed is updated to 1, and the bit of the combination (design combination) that is not displayed is updated to 0.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S221).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs control change processing (S222). In this control change process, the reel stop information group is updated when a specific stop position is reached.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S223). Here, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 122) (S224), and executes the process of step S210.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process.

<Priority pull-in control processing>
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the priority pull-in control process executed in step S216 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S230).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the stop start position stored in the main RAM 95 (S231).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB gaming state is in operation (S232). In this determination process, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 36) is “1”, it is determined that the MB game state is in operation, and when it is “0”, MB It is determined that the gaming state is not active.

  If it is determined that the MB gaming state is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 determines that the search target reel determined in step S213 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 125 is the left reel 3L. It is determined whether or not (S233).

  If it is determined in step S232 that the MB gaming state is not in operation (NO), or if it is determined in step S233 that the search target reel is not the left reel 3L (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop control process. The priority order table (see FIG. 24) corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data determined in step S215 is set (S234).

  For example, if the number of sliding symbols determined by the stop table (stop data table) is 4, the number of sliding symbols determination data in the priority order table is set in the 4th row (address).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 as the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S235). That is, it is determined to search five times from 0 to 4 frames.

  If it is determined in step S233 that the search target reel is the left reel 3L (YES), the main CPU 93 sets an MB gaming state priority order table (see FIG. 25) according to the number of sliding piece determination data. (S236).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets 3 as the initial value of the priority order and sets 2 as the number of checks (S237).

  After executing the processing of step S235 or step S237, the main CPU 93 sets the sliding piece number determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S239).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires pull-in priority order data of the stop search position (S240).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in the process of step S240 is equal to or higher than the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S241).

  If it is determined that the pull-in priority data acquired in the process of step S241 is greater than or equal to the pull-in priority data acquired previously (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the number of sliding frames (S242). .

  In step S241, when it is determined that the pull-in priority data acquired in the process in step S240 is not equal to or higher than the pull-in priority data acquired previously (NO), or after executing the process in step S242, the main CPU 93 performs priority. 1 is subtracted from each of the order and the number of checks (S243).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is 0 (S244). If it is determined that the number of checks is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the number of sliding frames (S245) and ends the priority pull-in control process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the number of checks is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S239.

<Bonus end check process>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the bonus end check process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is operating (S280). In this process, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 36) is “1”, it is determined that the MB is operating, and when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “0”. It is determined that the MB is not operating.

  If it is determined that the MB is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the MB is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 executes CB termination processing (S281). In this CB end processing, bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is reset to “0”. That is, during the MB operation, the operation and the end of the CB are repeated until the medal payout reaches the bonus end number.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the bonus end number counter indicating the remaining payout number (S282), and determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (S283).

  If it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 performs MB end processing (S284). In the MB end process, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is reset to “0”.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end command transmission process (S285), and ends the bonus end check process. In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus end command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. Here, the bonus end command data represents, for example, that the bonus has ended.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop switch 53d is set to ON (S286). When the MB end process is performed (step S284) and the stop switch 53d is set to ON (YES in step S286), the main CPU 93 interrupts the game. Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change button 53e is pressed (operated) when the stop switch 53d is set to ON (YES) (S287), and when it is not pressed (S287). If NO, the process again determines whether or not the stop switch 53d is set to ON (S286). As described above, when the stop switch 53d is set to ON (YES in step S286) and the setting change button 53e is not pressed (NO in S287), the main CPU 93 performs steps S286 and S286. By repeatedly executing the process of S287, a process for substantially suspending the game is performed.

  If the stop switch 53d is not set to ON in step S286 (NO), or if the setting change button 53e is pressed (YES) in step S287, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

<Bonus activation check process>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the bonus operation check process executed in step S26 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is operating (S290). In this process, when bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is “1”, it is determined that the MB is operating, and when bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is “0”, MB is determined. Judged not working.

  If it is determined that the MB is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the CB operation process (S291) and ends the bonus operation check process. In the CB operation process, bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the MB is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB has won (S292).

  If it is determined that the MB has won (YES), the main CPU 93 executes MB operation processing (S293). In the MB operation process, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1”, 30 is set to the bonus end number counter, and bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S294), executes a bonus start command transmission process (S295), and ends the bonus operation check process. In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95.

  If it is determined in step S292 that the MB has not won (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a replay is displayed (S296).

  If it is determined that no replay is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the replay is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 makes an automatic insertion request for copying the value of the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter (S297), and ends the bonus operation check process.

<Interrupt processing under main CPU control>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S300).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an input port check process shown in FIG. 130 (S301). In this process, the main CPU 93 confirms the presence / absence of a signal transmitted to the sub control circuit 101.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores input state command data representing on-edge and off-edge information of various switches including on-edge and off-edge of the start switch 79, stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R, etc. in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95. Store.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes timer update processing (S302).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an effect timer update process (S303).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel control process for controlling the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S304). More specifically, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in response to a request for starting the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, that is, in response to the start operation. Control is performed so that 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate. Further, the main CPU 93 performs control so that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the stop operation stops in response to the stop operation.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S305). For example, the main CPU 93 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, etc. on various display units.

  Next, the main CPU 93 restores the register (S306), and terminates the interrupt process that occurs periodically.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the input port check process executed in step S301 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93.

  First, the main CPU 93 checks the state of each input port (S310).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the state of the previous interrupt, that is, the input port before one interrupt in the main RAM 95 (S311), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 95 (S312).

  As described above, the main CPU 93 can check the states of both input ports by comparing the state of the input port before one interrupt with the current state of the input port. Thus, it is checked whether the state of the input port has changed, for example, whether or not the button 22 has been pressed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 95 (S313). In the present embodiment, the on-edge refers to a state where the button is pressed, and the off-edge refers to a state where the button is released.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates input state command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated input state command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S314). The input port check process is terminated.

[Sub-control processing]
One CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 131 to 166.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing power-on processing of the sub CPU 102 at power-on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S320). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs error check of the sub RAM 103 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task that is a task group for timer interrupt synchronization, a sound control task, and a mother task shown in FIG. 134 that is a task group for VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 132 (S321). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, It is a process which performs the process which controls a lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 133 (S322). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 controls the sound output state from the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task (S323) and aborts the power-on process. The mother task is a task group for VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when an image of one frame is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is used.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task activated in step S321 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S330). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization processing of lamp related data (S331).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for a timer interrupt (S332). In this process, until the sub CPU 102 receives a timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group for command reception interrupt synchronization can be cited. Moreover, a task group (not shown) for power supply interrupt synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like can be given.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 133 (S333). In this process, the task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In this embodiment, the priority order of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization is basically the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S333, the sound control task at the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S333, among the sound control task shown in FIG. 133, the processes in steps S342 and S343 are executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a lamp data analysis process (S334), executes a lamp effect execution process (S335), and executes the process of step S332.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the sound control task activated in step S322 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of sound related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R (S340). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a task in the next priority of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization that is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S341).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes sound data analysis processing (S342), performs sound effect execution processing (S343), and executes processing in step S341.

<Mother task>
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the mother task activated in step S323 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (S350), activates the main board communication task (S351), and activates the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the main task activated in step S350 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes a VSYNC interrupt initialization process (S360), and waits for a VSYNC interrupt (S361). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a drawing process (S362), and executes the process of step S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task activated in step S351 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S370). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not four hours or more have elapsed as a predetermined time since the main power supply of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off (S371). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the date and time when the main power of the pachislot machine 1 stored in the power-off date and time storage area of the sub RAM 103 is turned off in the power interruption occurrence processing (see FIG. 171) described later. The current date and time acquired from the RTC (not shown) provided in the control circuit 101 is compared, and it is determined whether or not four hours or more have elapsed since the main power supply of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off.

  In the process of step S371, when it is determined that four hours or more have elapsed since the main power supply of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines a normal penalty flag (described later) and a normal penalty counter. (Described later), a pseudo bonus penalty counter (described later), and a penalty total occurrence counter (described later) are cleared (S372).

  In this process, the sub CPU 102 temporarily turns off the power of the gaming machine because the main power is on after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off. It is determined that the main power source of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on by a power-on operation by a game store clerk rather than every so-called power failure, which is a fraudulent act to be performed, and the values of each flag and counter related to the penalty state are initialized Execute the process.

  After executing the process of step S372 or in the process of step S371, if it is determined that four hours or more have not passed since the main power supply of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off (NO), the sub CPU 102 receives the received command This check is executed (S373).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the received command is a normal command type (S374). In this process, if it is determined in the process of step S373 that the received command is not a normal command type (NO), the sub CPU 102 is inappropriate for the progress of the game due to the action or communication error. It is determined that the command has been received, the received command is discarded, and the process of step S373 is executed again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S374 that a normal command type has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is a legitimate command and obtains game information from the received command. The created game information is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S375). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 137 (S376), and executes the process of step S373.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in step S376 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect content determination process shown in FIG. 139 (S380), executes a ramp data determination process (S381), executes a sound data determination process (S382), and registers each determined data. In step S383, the command analysis process is terminated.

<Anime task>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the animation task activated in step S352 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change from the previous game information (S390). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 indicates that the current game information updated by the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG. 129 is the game information registered in the sub RAM 103 in the previous interrupt processing. Check if the game information is different.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes object control processing (S391). Specifically, when a check result indicating that the game information has changed is obtained in step S390, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change in the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes animation task management processing (S392). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects. When executing the animation task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of step S390.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing executed in step S380 of the command analysis processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an initialization command has been received (S400). If it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization command reception process (S401), and ends the effect content determination process. In the initialization command reception process, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command and the normal mode reference table lottery table (see FIG. 39) at the time of setting change based on the reception of the initialization command. The table is set with reference.

  On the other hand, when determining that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S402). If it is determined that a medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a medal insertion command reception process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a medal insertion command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command has been received (S404). If it is determined that a start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process shown in FIG. 140 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command receiving process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a reel rotation start command has been received (S406). If it is determined that a reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a reel rotation start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel stop command has been received (S408). If it is determined that a reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception process (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, for example, the type of the stop reel, the stop start position, the number of sliding frames, or the scheduled stop position is transmitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S410). If it is determined that a winning action command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a winning action command reception process (S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the winning operation command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a winning operation command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bonus start command has been received (S412). If it is determined that a bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus start command reception process (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus start command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a bonus start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a bonus end command has been received (S414). If it is determined that a bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus end command reception process (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus end command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether an input state command has been received (S416). If it is determined that an input state command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes an input state command reception process (S417), and ends the effect content determination process.

  In the input state command reception process, for example, the main CPU 93 transmits as an input state command whether each operation unit is in an on-edge state or an off-edge state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S416 that the input state command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 transmits various commands to the sub CPU 102. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 93 in one direction.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the start command reception time process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 139. In the following description, setting the state (flag, value) in the storage area (counter) means that the bit corresponding to the state (flag) set in the storage area is set to “1” (ON) (Flag, value) is stored.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a reel effect process (S419). In the reel effect process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to give a game advantageous to the player as a privilege based on whether or not a release signal transmitted by the main CPU 93 is received in the game start effect control process (FIG. 120). Judgment is made. Next, the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect random number value, and stores the extracted effect random number value in the effect random number storage area of the sub RAM 103 (S420).

  After that, the sub CPU 102 includes an AT winning information storage area, a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag storage area, a pseudo bonus ART lottery winning flag storage area, and a pseudo bonus medium bonus bonus winning flag lottery winning flag storage area. Each winning storage area is initialized (S421). Here, the flag stored in each winning storage area is set when winning is performed by a predetermined lottery executed in each control process by the sub CPU 102 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing at the start of the game (S422). Here, in the common process at the start of the game, the sub CPU 102 determines that the end condition is satisfied when the winning action command is not received and a sequence error occurs, and terminates the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state and internal winning. When the winning combination is a premier flag, a process for initializing each flag and counter value related to the penalty state is executed. Further, the details of the common process at the start of the game will be described after the description of the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process (see FIG. 164) in which the flags and counters relating to the penalty state are described in detail.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state set in the sub gaming state storage area is the normal gaming state (S423). In this process, it is determined that the normal gaming state is set. If the answer is YES (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the normal middle processing (S424), and ends the start command reception processing. Here, in the normal process, the sub CPU 102 displays the process related to the transition of the gaming state such as the normal time pseudo bonus type lottery process (see step S444) and the normal time precursor game number lottery process (see step S459) and the probability state. A normal high-accuracy transition game number lottery process to be determined (see step S462) is executed. Further, in the normal middle process, the sub CPU 102 is configured not to execute the push order navigation.

  If it is determined in step S423 that the normal gaming state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first AT state is set in the sub gaming state storage area ( S425). In this process, if it is determined that the first AT state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the process during the first AT state (S426), and ends the start command reception process. . Here, in the process during the first AT state, the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state in which the eight-bell role push order navigation is executed during the first AT state game number.

  If it is determined in step S425 that the first AT state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the second AT state is set in the sub gaming state storage area. (S427). In this process, if it is determined that the second AT state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state process (S428) and ends the start command reception process. . Here, in the process during the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 performs the push-order navigation of the eight-bell role during the second number of AT state games, and produces different effects depending on the selected AT continuation type. Execute the second AT state to execute.

  If it is determined in step S427 that the second AT state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is set in the sub gaming state storage area. (S429). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process (S430), and ends the start command reception process. Here, in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning pseudo bonus state is promoted to a pseudo bonus state that is more advantageous to the player.

  If it is determined in step S429 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus transition state is set in the sub gaming state storage area. (S431). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus transition state process (S432) and ends the start command reception process. Here, in the pseudo bonus transition state process, the sub CPU 102 executes the lottery transition to the special pseudo bonus state and the promotion lottery of the pseudo bonus state that is won until the pseudo bonus transition combination (described later) is won, This is a gaming state in which a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is executed when a bonus transition combination is won.

  If it is determined in step S431 that the pseudo bonus transition state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo bonus state is set in the sub gaming state storage area (S433). ). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the process during the pseudo bonus (S434), and ends the start command receiving process. Here, in the pseudo-bonus middle processing, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo-bonus state in which a push order navigation is performed for winning the eight bell combinations a predetermined number of times. Further, in this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process.

  As described above, when the normal gaming state is set in the secondary gaming state storage area, the sub CPU 102 shifts the secondary gaming state to the normal gaming state in which the push order navigation is not executed.

<Reel production process>
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the reel effect process executed in step S419 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 acquires information on the spinning effect pattern from the start command received from the main CPU 93, and determines whether or not the spinning effect pattern is 1 or more (S850). As described in the reel effect lottery process (FIG. 118) of the main CPU 93, when the player wins a premier role, any one of the reel effect patterns 1 to 4 is produced by lottery. It is determined. For this reason, when the rotation effect pattern is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 determines that the premier role has been won internally. In the process of step S850, when the spinning effect pattern is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel effect process.

  In the process of step S850, when the rotation effect pattern is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a wait time preset for each rotation effect pattern based on the rotation effect pattern, and after setting The wait time countdown process is started as the time elapses (S851). Here, the wait time set in advance for each rotation effect pattern is set according to each rotation effect pattern as shown in the release counter lottery table of FIG. A wait time of 10 seconds is set, a wait time of 15 seconds is set in the case of the rotation effect pattern 2, a wait time of 20 seconds is set in the case of the rotation effect pattern 3, and the rotation effect pattern 4 In this case, a wait time of 25 seconds is set.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a release signal has been received (S852). The sub CPU 102 acquires information related to the release signal from the start command received from the main CPU 93, and determines whether or not the release signal has been received.

  If the release signal is not accepted in the process of step S852 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the wait time is 0 (S864). Since the wait time is set in step S851 and the wait time countdown process is started, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the time has elapsed until the wait time becomes 0 by the countdown process. . In the process of step S864, when the wait time is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel effect process. On the other hand, if the wait time is not 0 in the process of step S864 (NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S852 and executes again the process of determining whether or not the release signal has been accepted.

  If a release signal is received in the process of step S852 (YES), the sub CPU 102 calculates the time taken from the time when the wait time is set in step S851 until the release signal is received, and the calculation result is calculated from the wait time. A subtraction process is performed (S853). When the release signal is received before the wait time becomes 0 in the wait time countdown process, the calculation result by the subtraction process becomes a positive value, and when the release signal is received after the wait time becomes 0 The calculation result by the subtraction process becomes a negative value. As described above, the sub CPU 102 that calculates the time taken from when the wait time is set to when the release signal is received and subtracts the calculated time from the wait time constitutes a release operation completion determination unit.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the calculation result of the subtraction process in step S853 is negative (S854). If the calculation result is negative in the process of step S854 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the wait time is 0 (S864). In the process of step S864, when the wait time is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel effect process. On the other hand, if the wait time is not 0 in the process of step S864 (NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S852 and executes again the process of determining whether or not the release signal has been accepted.

  In the process of step S854, when the calculation result is not negative (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the first AT state (S855). The sub CPU 102 determines whether the sub gaming state is the first AT state based on the state of the flag recorded in the sub gaming state storage area.

  When the sub gaming state corresponds to the first AT state in the process of step S855 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a first AT state game number lottery process (S856). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state game number random determination table (see FIG. 99) and determines the first AT state game number that is the number of times that the unit game is executed in the first AT state. To do.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the lottery result of the first AT state game number in step S856 to the first AT state game number counter (S857). With this process, when the secondary gaming state is the first AT state, the number of games in the first AT state game increases, so that the gaming state (effect state) in which the push order navigation with the eight bells is performed is executed. ) Will be executed by the increased number of games. Therefore, the player performs “push order navigation” which is advantageous for the player by executing a predetermined number of release operations (input operations) before the wait time based on the spinning effect pattern elapses in the bonus game. It is possible to increase the number of games played, and a privilege is given to the player. After the lottery result is added to the first AT state game number counter, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel effect process.

  On the other hand, when the sub gaming state is not the first AT state in the process of step S855 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the second AT state (S858). The sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the second AT state based on the state of the flag recorded in the sub gaming state storage area.

  If the sub gaming state corresponds to the second AT state in the process of step S858 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state game number lottery process (S859). The sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state game number lottery table (see FIG. 99) and determines the second AT state game number that is the number of times that the unit game is executed in the second AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the lottery result of the second AT state game number in step S859 to the second AT state game number counter (S860). With this process, when the secondary gaming state is the second AT state, the number of games in the second AT state game increases, so that the gaming state (effect state) in which the push order navigation with the eight bells is performed is executed. ) Will be executed by the increased number of games. Therefore, the player performs “push order navigation” which is advantageous for the player by executing a predetermined number of release operations (input operations) before the wait time based on the spinning effect pattern elapses in the bonus game. It is possible to increase the number of games played, and a privilege is given to the player. After the lottery result is added to the second AT state game number counter, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel effect process.

  If the sub gaming state does not correspond to the second AT state in the process of step S858 (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied shown in FIG. 89 to determine the loop rate ( S861). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines one of loop B, loop C, loop D, and loop E as shown in FIG. The loop rate of each loop is set to 33% for Loop B, 50% for Loop C, 66% for Loop D, and 80% for Loop E.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines 1 as the ART success / failure (S862). When the loop rate is determined in step S861, as shown in the ART reference table of FIG. 53, the ART success / failure is set to 1 in the common processing (FIG. 145) after the ART lottery described below. . For this reason, the sub CPU 102 performs processing for determining the ART success / failure value to 1 in accordance with the determination of the loop rate in step S861.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery (S863). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the loop rate determined in step 861 and the value of 1 for determining whether or not the ART is determined in step S862 in predetermined areas of the sub RAM 103, respectively. Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel effect process.

  As described above, the process of adding the lottery result of the first AT state game number to the first AT state game number counter (S857), and the lottery result of the second AT state game number is the second AT state game number. The sub CPU 102 that performs the process of adding to the counter (S860), the loop rate is determined (S861), and the process of determining 1 as ART success / failure (S862) constitutes an effect state transition unit.

<Normal medium processing>
142 and 143 are flowcharts showing the normal processing executed in step S424 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal penalty generation process (S440). Here, in the normal penalty generation process, the sub CPU 102 determines that a disadvantageous condition is satisfied and generates a penalty state when a sequence error occurs when the process for receiving a winning action command is not executed in the previous game. Processing, and processing for turning on a normal penalty flag (described later) in order to generate a penalty state in the next game when a sequence error occurs in the current game when the process for receiving a winning action command is not executed. Execute.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S441). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous normal middle processing.

  If it is determined in step S441 that the pseudo bonus type 0 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the normal penalty counter is 0 (S442). ). Here, the normal penalty counter is a counter that is stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103 and sets the number of games in which the penalty state is executed when the penalty state occurs. The sub CPU 102 determines that it is in the penalty state when the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0.

  If it is determined in step S442 that the value set in the normal penalty counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S443). Here, the pseudo bonus ceiling counter is a counter that counts the number of unit games when the pseudo bonus state is not won, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, 600), In the bonus type lottery, a normal pseudo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 48D) that always wins any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is referred to.

  Further, the sub RAM 103 stores a pseudo special game non-winning number, which is the number of unit games executed when the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 are not won, by a pseudo bonus ceiling counter.

  After executing the process of step S443 or in the process of step S442, when determining that the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the normal-time pseudo bonus type lottery process Is executed (S444). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines a normal pseudo bonus lottery table (see FIGS. 48A to 48D) to be referred to based on the currently selected probability state and the value of the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. A pseudo bonus type lottery process is executed with reference to the determined normal pseudo bonus lottery table.

  If it is determined that the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, even if the result of the normal pseudo bonus type lottery (see step S444) is non-winning in the previous game, the process of step S443 Is omitted, the sub CPU 102 gives the player a fifth penalty of not adding the number of unit games that were not won to the normal pseudo bonus type lottery when the penalty state has occurred. Can do.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S444 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S445). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S446). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the normal time pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S444.

  If it is determined in step S446 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes a pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S447). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes a pseudo bonus ceiling counter because the pseudo bonus state is won in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S444.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery process (S448). In this process, the sub-CPU 102 is based on the normal mode and the probability state determined with reference to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 40) based on the currently set AT state non-winning count and the selected table. , To determine a normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table (see (a) to (c) of FIG. 54 to FIG. 56), and refer to the determined normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table, An ART lottery process is executed.

  Further, in this process, when the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, the sub CPU 102 always makes a “normal” pseudo bonus winning lottery table (“lost”) regardless of the winning pseudo bonus state ( Referring to (not shown), a sixth lottery process in which, when the ART lottery process is executed, the result of the ART lottery process is always “losing” when the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 are won in the penalty state. Penalties can be given to players.

  As shown in steps S446 and S448, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state, and the loop rate as a continuation probability of continuing the AT state. And the number of sets as the number of times to continue the AT state. Here, the sub CPU 102 is configured to execute an ART lottery when a pseudo bonus is won in each process described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (S449). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery executed in step S <b> 448 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART success / failure set in the ART success / failure storage area is an AT winning (S450). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in the normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery executed in step S448.

  If it is determined in step S450 that the AT is not winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number during the pseudo bonus and turns off the lottery permission flag (S451). Here, the first AT state game number extra lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus determines whether or not the first AT state game number extra lottery is executed in the pseudo bonus middle process (see FIGS. 150 and 151). It is a flag to do.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the AT state non-winning number counter (S452). In this process, since the sub CPU 102 wins the normal pseudo bonus type lottery in step S444 and does not win the AT state in the normal pseudo bonus winning lottery in step S448, the AT state non-winning count is calculated. The AT state non-winning number counter to be stored is incremented by one.

  In this way, in the ART lottery at the time of the pseudo bonus state winning, the sub RAM 103 stores the number of times that the AT state has become non-winning in the AT state non-winning number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes normal mode number determination processing (S453), and sets the normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number (S454). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 refers to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 40), and determines the normal mode number from the currently selected table and the value stored in the AT state non-winning counter. The normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number is set in the normal mode storage area.

  Here, as described above, in the normal mode reference table, the AT state non-winning count is a specific number defined for each table (for example, 9 times for the table A and 4 times for the table W). In this case, the normal modes 4 and 5 are configured to be set in the normal mode storage area by the sub CPU 102.

  When the normal modes 4 and 5 are set, the sub CPU 102 determines the normal normal mode 4 and 5 selection pseudo bonus state winning ART lottery (not shown) in the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery processing of step S46. The ART lottery is executed with reference to the table. Here, the ART lottery table when the normal normal mode 4 or 5 is selected and the pseudo bonus state is won is a probability table in which lottery values are associated with each other so as to make sure that the ART win is the AT winning number that wins the AT state. is there.

  That is, the sub CPU 102 is configured to shift the sub game state to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends when the AT non-winning number is a specific number and the pseudo bonus state is won.

  Thereby, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment shifts the sub gaming state to the AT state when the ART lottery non-winning count is a specific number and the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a permanent increase in the loop rate and the number of sets, to suppress unnecessary loss on the game store side, and to allow the player to play while maintaining a moderate joy be able to.

  If it is determined in the process of step S450 that the game is AT winning (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the first lottery game number in the pseudo bonus and the lottery permission flag (S455). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag as an AT state flag (S456). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the AT state flag storage area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S454 and step S456 or in the processing of step S446, when determining that the pseudo bonus type 0 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the value set in the precursor counter is It is determined whether or not it is 0 (S457). Here, the precursor counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103, and stores the number of precursor games.

  If it is determined in step S457 that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S458).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S457 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a normal precursor game number lottery process (S459). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to refer to the normal-time precursor game number lottery table based on whether or not the pseudo-bonus state is true, whether or not the ART is true when the pseudo-bonus state is won, and the normal mode and probability state currently set (see FIGS. 96), and the normal sign game number lottery process for determining the sign game number is executed with reference to the determined normal sign game number lottery table.

  In this process, when the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, the sub CPU 102 indicates the normal time precursor shown in FIGS. 97 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 98 (a) to (d). By drawing the number of precursor games with reference to the number-of-games lottery table, it is possible to give the player a first penalty of not shifting to the precursor state by not giving the number of precursor games in the penalty state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the normal time precursor game number lottery executed in step S459 in the precursor counter (S460).

  After executing the processing of step S458 or step S460, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S461). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the normal time pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S444.

  If it is determined in the process of step S461 that the pseudo bonus type 0 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a highly probable game number lottery process (S462). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines a highly-probable transition game number lottery table to be referenced (see (a) to (d) in FIGS. 43 to 46) based on the currently set normal mode and probability state. Then, with reference to the determined high-precision transition game number lottery table, a high-precision transition game that determines the probability state and the number of games in each probability state when high probability or super-high probability is selected as the probability state. A number lottery process is executed.

  In this process, when the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, the sub CPU 102 refers to the probability transition game number lottery table shown in FIGS. And the number of games in each probability state when high probability or ultra high accuracy is selected as the probability state, and in the penalty state, the probability state is not normally transferred with high accuracy or ultra high accuracy. In the medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery (see step S448), it is possible to give the player a third penalty that the probability of winning a loss increases.

  In addition, when the sub gaming state is the normal gaming state, the sub CPU 102 determines a probability state indicating a degree of advantage for the player by a highly-probable transition game number lottery as a probability state lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the values currently set in the high-accuracy counter and the ultra-high-accuracy counter (S463), and uses the result of the high-accuracy transition game number lottery executed in step S462 as the corresponding high-accuracy counter And it sets to the ultra high accuracy counter (S464). Here, the high-accuracy counter and the ultra-high-accuracy counter are counters stored in predetermined areas of the sub-RAM 103, respectively, and when the sub-CPU 102 selects high-accuracy and ultra-high accuracy as the probability state, the probability state The number of games to be executed in is stored. Further, by executing the process of step S464 after the execution of the process of step S463, the sub CPU 102 performs the high-accuracy counter and Can be set to an ultra-high accuracy counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state in the sub game state storage area (S465), and ends the normal process.

  If it is determined in the process of step S461 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0. Judgment is made (S466). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the state transition common process at the end of the precursor shown in FIG. 147 (S467). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a process of determining the sub game state of the next game when the precursor state is finished.

  After executing the process of step S467 or in the process of step S466, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the high accuracy counter and the ultra high accuracy counter. Initialization is performed (S468), and the normal medium processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of step S441 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the warning signal process (S469) and ends the normal medium process. . In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state in which the promotion lottery is executed.

  In the processing of step S441 and step S469, when any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set, the sub CPU 102 sets the secondary gaming state to the player more than the set pseudo bonus type. A transition is made to a precursor state in which a promotion lottery of whether or not to promote to an advantageous pseudo bonus type is executed.

<Normal penalty generation processing>
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the normal penalty generation process executed in step S440 of the normal middle process shown in FIGS. 142 and 143 and in step S526 of the pseudo bonus transition state penalty process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the normal penalty flag is ON (S470). Here, the normal penalty flag is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, and when the sub game state is the normal game state or the pseudo bonus transition state, the sub CPU 102 performs a start command reception process (see FIG. 140). ) Is always turned on, and a winning action command reception process (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is executed and is always turned off.

  If it is determined in the process of step S470 that the normal penalty flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 does not execute the process upon receiving a winning action command and a sequence error occurs, that is, every time a winning action command is spilled. It is determined that there is a high possibility of an action, and 3 is added to the normal penalty counter as a specific number of games (S471).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value normally set in the penalty counter is greater than 10 (S472). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value set in the normal penalty counter is larger than 10 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets 10 in the normal penalty counter (S473).

  By the process of step S473, even if the disadvantageous condition is continuously satisfied, the sub CPU 102 does not increase the number of games in which the penalty state continues to be more than 10 games. Can prevent the interest of

  After executing the process of step S473, if it is determined that the normal penalty flag is not ON in the process of step S470 (NO), or the value set in the normal penalty counter is 10 or less in the process of step S472 If it is determined (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the normal penalty flag to ON (S474), and ends the normal penalty generation process. In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal penalty flag to ON, so that the normal penalty flag is turned OFF in the penalty winning process (see FIG. 168) executed in the process for receiving the winning action command in this game. Until the normal penalty flag is set to ON.

<Common processing after ART lottery>
FIG. 145 shows steps S863 of the reel effect processing shown in FIG. 141, steps S449 of the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, and steps S493 of the precursory processing shown in FIG. 146, and the simulations shown in FIGS. 150 and 151. Step S538 in the bonus mid-process, step S565 in the pseudo-bonus end process shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, step S600 in the first pre-AT state start process shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, and steps S600 in FIGS. Step S639 of the first AT state processing, Step S679 of the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, Step S682, Step S737 of the second AT state end processing shown in FIG. 162, and FIG. Common processing after ART lottery executed in step S762 of the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state shown It is a flow chart showing.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART success / failure in the ART success / failure storage area (S475). In this process, among the results of the ART lottery used as the trigger for execution of the common process after the ART lottery, information related to ART success / failure is set in the ART success / failure storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the loop rate at the end of the loop reference stock table (S476). In this process, the information related to the loop rate is set at the end of the loop reference stock table among the results of the ART lottery that has triggered the execution of the common process after the ART lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART set number in the loop stock counter (S477). In this process, information related to the number of ART sets is stored in a loop stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103 among the results of the ART lottery that triggered the execution of the common process after the ART lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of special mode 6 sets in the special mode 6 stock counter (S478), and ends the common processing after the ART lottery. In this process, among the results of the ART lottery that triggered the execution of the common process after the ART lottery, information related to the number of special mode 6 sets is stored in the special mode 6 stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. To do.

<Predictive treatment>
FIG. 146 shows the step S469 in the normal mid-process shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the step S623 in the first AT state shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, and the second AT state shown in FIGS. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed in step S707 of a process.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S480). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table (see FIG. 5) based on the sub gaming state set in the sub gaming state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. 49, each of (a) to (f) in FIG. 50) is determined, and the determined pseudo bonus promotion lottery table is referred to, and the pseudo bonus that is more advantageous for the player than the currently winning pseudo bonus state is determined. A pseudo bonus promotion lottery for lottering whether or not to be promoted to a state is executed, and the result of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery is set in a pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage region stored in a predetermined region of the sub RAM 103.

  In this process, if the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIGS. By executing the promotion lottery, in the penalty state, it is possible to give the player a second penalty that the winning pseudo bonus state is not promoted to a pseudo bonus state that is more advantageous to the player.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion lottery is won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S480.

  If it is determined in step S481 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S482). . In this process, since the sub CPU 102 has won the promotion lottery, the sub CPU 102 is currently winning by changing the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table to the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery. The pseudo bonus type is promoted to the pseudo bonus type determined by the promotion lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 5 (S483). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not 5 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 6. (S484).

  If it is determined in step S483 that the pseudo bonus type 5 is set (YES) or if it is determined in step S484 that the pseudo bonus type 6 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 Turns on the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag (S485). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S485 or in the process of step S484, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not the pseudo bonus type 6 (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag ( S486). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After determining that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is not set after executing the processing of step S486 or in the processing of step S481 (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus winning lottery processing during pseudo bonus winning. (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a lottery process for determining whether or not to win the pseudo bonus type 8 as the pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type bonus winning lottery executed in step S487 (S488). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the precursor counter (S489).

  If it is determined in the process of step S488 that the bonus bonus type 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the precursor counter (S490), and the pseudo bonus type 8 is added to the top of the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is set (S491). In this process, the sub CPU 102 can set the pseudo bonus type 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table while stocking the winning pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning during pseudo bonus winning (S492). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process with reference to the ART bonus lottery table during the pseudo bonus winning (see FIG. 57).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (S493). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus lottery during the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S 492 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART success / failure set in the ART success / failure storage area is an AT winning (S494). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in the ART bonus winning lottery during the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S492.

  If it is determined in the process of step S494 that the AT is a win (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the number of first AT state games during the pseudo bonus and turns on the lottery permission flag (S495).

  After executing the processing of step S489 and step S495, or in the processing of step S494, when determining that the AT is not winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value stored in the precursor counter is 0 or not. It is determined whether or not (S496). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor process.

  If it is determined in step S496 that the value stored in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes state transition common processing at the end of precursor shown in FIG. 147 (S497). Then, the precursory process is terminated.

<Common process for status transition at the end of precursory>
FIG. 147 is a step S467 of the normal middle process shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, a step S497 of the precursory process shown in FIG. 146, a step S655 of the first AT state process shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a state transition common process at the end of a precursor executed in step S700 of the second AT state process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S500). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub gaming state storage area (S501), and the state transition common at the end of the sign is common. The process ends.

  Thus, when the pseudo bonus type 8 is set, the sub CPU 102 is configured to shift the sub game state directly from the precursor state to the pseudo bonus state without going through the pseudo bonus transition state.

  If it is determined in step S500 that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is ON (S502). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag to OFF (S503), and the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is simulated in the sub gaming state storage area. The bonus promotion game state is set (S504), and the state transition common process at the end of the precursor is ended.

  As described above, when the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is set, that is, when it is determined to transition to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state, the sub CPU 102 enters the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state after the precursor state ends. Transition to the secondary game state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S502 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub gaming state storage area (S505), and the sign ends. End the common state transition process.

<Pseudo bonus transition status processing>
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus transition state process executed in step S432 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect based on the pseudo bonus reference table (see FIG. 47) (S510). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect, refers to the pseudo bonus reference table, and executes the effect in the pseudo bonus state corresponding to the winning pseudo bonus type. For example, when the pseudo bonus type 1 is set in the pseudo bonus type stock table, the pseudo bonus reference table is referred to execute the effect of the red same color pseudo bonus state.

  Further, when the winning order bell is won, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table and the effect gaming state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. The pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table (see FIGS. 51 and 52 (a) to (e)) is determined, and the determined bonus bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table is referenced to win the eight-bell role. Execute a lottery for forward navigation.

  For example, when the pseudo bonus type 1 is set and the effect gaming state 0 is stored in the main RAM 95, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery of push order navigation for winning the sheet bell role is executed.

  Here, when the sub CPU 102 executes the push order navigation for winning the eight bell combination, the main CPU 93 shifts the effect gaming state to the effect gaming state 1 when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state. be able to.

  In this processing, when the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table shown in FIG. By determining whether or not there is push order navigation, in the penalty state, the player can be given a fourth penalty of not winning the eight-bell role when winning the push order bell by not performing push order navigation. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the normal replay which is a pseudo bonus transition combination is won (S512). In this process, if it is determined that the normal replay is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the effect game stored in the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table and a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. Based on the status, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table to be referred to is determined, and the determined pseudo bonus determination screen navigation lottery table is referred to, the push order navigation lottery is executed. It is determined whether or not it is a push order navigation that causes the first stop operation to be executed other than the left stop button 19L (S513).

  In this process, if the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table shown in FIG. In the penalty state, the first stop operation is not executed except for the left stop button 19L when the pseudo bonus transition combination is won, and the sub game state is changed. A fourth penalty of not shifting to the pseudo bonus state can be given to the player.

  If it is determined in the process of step S513 that the first stop operation has been won for the push order navigation other than the left stop button 19L (YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the pseudo stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. The bonus shift flag is turned on (S514).

  After executing the process of step S514, if it is determined in the process of step S512 that the winning combination is not a normal replay (NO) or the process of step S513, the first stop operation is executed by the left stop button 19L. If it is determined that is executed (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S515).

  In the process of step S515, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table to be referred to based on the sub gaming state set in the sub gaming state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (See (a) to (f) in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50), the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process is executed with reference to the determined pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, and the result of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery is obtained. The pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103 is set.

  In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines that the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, or the value set in the pseudo bonus penalty counter (described later) is other than 0, FIG. 50) By executing the pseudo bonus promotion lottery with reference to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 50 (f), in the penalty state, the winning pseudo bonus state becomes a more advantageous pseudo bonus state for the player. The player can be given a second penalty of not being promoted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S516). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion lottery has been won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S515.

  If it is determined in step S516 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S517). Then, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is turned ON (S518).

  After determining that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is not set after executing the processing of step S518 or in the processing of step S516 (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus winning lottery processing during pseudo bonus winning. (S519). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a lottery process for determining whether or not to win the pseudo bonus type 8 as the pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type 8 is won in the pseudo bonus winning lottery lottery executed in step S519 (S520). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus transition state process.

  If it is determined in the process of step S520 that the bonus bonus type 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 8 at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table (S521). In this process, the sub CPU 102 can set the pseudo bonus type 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table while stocking the winning pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART bonus lottery process during the pseudo bonus winning during the pseudo bonus winning (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process with reference to the ART bonus lottery table during the pseudo bonus winning (see FIG. 57).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (S523). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus lottery during pseudo bonus winning executed in step S 522 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus (S524), sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub game state storage area (S525), and performs the pseudo bonus transition state process. finish.

  It should be noted that when any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set in step S480 of the precursory process (see FIG. 146) and step S515 of the pseudo bonus transition state process, the sub CPU 102 is set. A promotion lottery is executed as to whether or not to promote to a pseudo bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the pseudo bonus type.

  From the normal mid-process shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the predictive mid-process shown in FIG. 146, and the pseudo bonus transition state process shown in FIG. The first to sixth penalties, which are effective disadvantages, can be generated, and it is possible to prevent the player from gaining profits without impairing the game performance, and when a penalty state occurs Even so, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being impaired.

<Pseudo Bonus Transition State Penalty Processing>
FIG. 149 is a pseudo bonus transition state penalty process executed in step S511 of the pseudo bonus transition state process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal penalty generation process (S526). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the normal penalty generation process shown in FIG.

  By executing the processing of step S526, the sub CPU 102 adds the value to the normal penalty counter and sets it when a predetermined disadvantageous condition is satisfied even when the sub gaming state is the pseudo bonus transition state. By doing so, a penalty state can be generated.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus transition flag is ON (S527). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition flag is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus transition state penalty process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S527 that the pseudo bonus transition flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus transition combination and the left stop button 19L in the pseudo bonus transition state process. Since the pseudo bonus transition state continues despite the fact that other than the first stop operation, the pseudo bonus transition state winning time process executed in step S783 of the winning action command reception process (see FIG. 166) (See FIG. 169) is not executed, that is, it is determined that there is a high possibility that there has been an action every time a winning action command is spilled, and the pseudo bonus penalty counter is set to 1 (S528), and pseudo bonus transition state penalty processing is performed. finish.

  Here, the pseudo bonus penalty counter is stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103, and when a sequence error occurs without receiving a winning action command in the pseudo bonus transition state, a value of “1” is set. It is a counter that maintains a state in which “1” is set as a value until the sub game state shifts to the pseudo bonus state. When the pseudo bonus penalty counter is set to “1”, the sub CPU 102 generates a penalty state.

<Processing during pseudo bonus>
150 and 151 are flowcharts showing the pseudo bonus medium process executed in step S434 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (S530). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is zero.

  If it is determined in step S530 that the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter based on the pseudo bonus reference table (see FIG. 47). (S531). In this process, since the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus state, refers to the pseudo bonus reference table, and executes it. The value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter associated with the pseudo bonus type is set.

  After executing the process of step S531 or in the process of step S530, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the push order navigation for winning the 8 bell combination. It is determined whether or not to execute (S532). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and determines by lottery whether or not to execute a push order navigation for winning an 8-bell combination when the push order bell is won.

  If it is determined in the process of step S532 that push order navigation for winning the eight bell combination is executed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter (S533). In this process, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter since the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the notification timing flag is ON (S534). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a notification timing flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is set. Here, when the first and second pseudo bonus selection effects are selected by the player, the notification timing flag is determined to notify that the player has won the AT state at the notification timing determined by lottery. This flag is set in the case.

  If it is determined in the process of step S534 that the notification timing flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter, the value stored in the notification timing counter, Are the same (S535). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the notification timing for notifying that the player has won the AT state has arrived due to the execution of the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination in step S532.

  If it is determined in step S535 that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is the same as the value stored in the notification timing counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 enters the AT state. An AT state notification effect for notifying that the player has won is executed (S536). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes an AT state notification effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player. For example, when the player selects the first pseudo bonus selection effect, the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state notification effect.

  By the processing of step S535 and step S536, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is selected before the start of the pseudo bonus state by the player when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined and the ART lottery is won. In the first AT state notification effect as a notification mode based on the pseudo bonus selection effect that has been made, it is notified at the notification timing determined by lottery that the AT winning is set in the ART determination storing area as the ART determination. Therefore, the player can imagine the future development of the game and the like from the timing of the effect informed according to the selected pseudo bonus selection effect and the timing at which the first AT state notification effect is executed. It is possible to broaden the range of strategies and enhance the interest in the development of games.

  Thus, in a state where the AT state is won, the sub CPU 102 executes the AT state notification effect in a notification mode based on the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player.

  After performing the process of step S536, if it is determined in the process of step S532 that the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination is not performed (NO), the notification timing flag is OFF in the process of step S534. When it is determined (NO) or when it is determined in the process of step S535 that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is different from the value stored in the notification timing counter (NO). Then, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART bonus lottery process during the pseudo bonus (S537). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART bonus medium lottery table to be referred to based on the ART bonus and the pseudo bonus color type stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 ((a) in FIGS. 58 to 60). (B) is determined, and the ART lottery process is executed with reference to the determined pseudo-bonus ART lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (S538). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus ART lottery executed in step S <b> 537 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery permission flag for the first AT state game number during pseudo bonus is ON (S539). In this process, if it is determined that the first AT state game number extra lottery permission flag during pseudo bonus is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the first AT state game number extra lottery process during pseudo bonus. Execute (S540). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the lottery table (see FIGS. 100A and 100B) for the first AT state game to be referred to based on whether or not the ART is successful, and determines the determined first AT state. With reference to the game number addition lottery table, the first AT state game number to be added is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number determined to be added as a result of the process of step S540 to the first AT state game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (S541). In this process, the sub CPU 102 can add the first AT state game number by lottery when winning the AT state.

  After executing the process of step S541 or in the process of step S539, if it is determined that the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag during pseudo bonus is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is in progress. The pseudo bonus extra lottery process is executed (S542). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and determines whether or not the player has won the pseudo bonus added state by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus medium bonus bonus added state lottery executed in the process of step S542 has been won (S543). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus extra lottery is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus extra stock counter (S544). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus added state stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 increments the pseudo bonus bonus counter by 1 (S545). In this process, the sub CPU 102 is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 because it wins the pseudo bonus extra lottery during the pseudo bonus, that is, a pseudo bonus extra state where at least one AT bonus is added. 1 is added to the pseudo bonus bonus counter which is a counter for counting the number of times the pseudo bonus ART lottery is won.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus medium addition bonus lottery winning flag (S546). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus medium bonus bonus added state lottery winning flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined after the process of step S546 or in the process of step S543 that the pseudo bonus medium bonus bonus lottery has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the pseudo bonus ART lottery is It is determined whether or not the state is won (S547). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in the pseudo bonus ART lottery process executed in step S537.

  If it is determined in step S547 that the AT state has been won (YES), 1 is added to the pseudo bonus extra counter (S548). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus medium addition counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of first AT state games during the pseudo bonus and turns on the lottery permission flag (S549). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART bonus lottery winning flag during the pseudo bonus (S550). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo-bonus ART lottery winning flag for identifying that the AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in the pseudo-bonus ART lottery process executed in step S537.

  After executing the process of step S550 or in the process of step S547, if it is determined that the AT state has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 has the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter being zero. Whether or not (S551). In this process, when it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S551 that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the notification timing flag OFF (S552). In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the notification timing flag because the pseudo bonus state ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus selection effect set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area is the third pseudo bonus selection effect (S553).

  If it is determined in step S553 that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery process (S554). ). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a predetermined number of times of push order navigation in the pseudo bonus state executed in a state where the player selects the third pseudo bonus selection effect, and is set in the pseudo bonus navigation counter. Therefore, referring to the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery table (see FIG. 111), the fact that the pseudo bonus state has ended is notified and set from the next game. By suggesting the normal mode to be performed, in the next normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery, the normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table (see (a) to (c) of FIGS. 54 to 56). ) To determine the content of the end effect.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is based on the normal mode in which any one normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table is set from a plurality of normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables. Since the ART lottery is executed based on the selected normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table, the probability of shifting to the AT state differs depending on the set normal mode, and the third pseudo-bonus selection effect is selected. In such a case, since the effect suggesting the set normal mode is executed at the end of the pseudo bonus state, the progress of the game can be easily predicted.

  After determining that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is not set after executing the process of step S554 or in the process of step S553 (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process at the end of the pseudo bonus ( S555), the process during the pseudo bonus is ended. In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a process of ending the pseudo bonus state and determining the content of the effect in the next game.

  Here, the sub CPU 102 performs the during-AT pseudo bonus type lottery process executed during the AT state (step S625 of the first AT state process shown in FIGS. 156 and 157 and the second pseudo process shown in FIGS. 158 to 160). In step S666 in the AT state process), when the first to fourth pseudo bonus states are executed by winning the pseudo bonus types 1 to 6, the process of step S555, which is the end of the pseudo bonus state, is executed. At the time of execution, a special mode suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting the special mode set in the special mode storage area is executed. Here, details of the special mode suggestion effect will be described later.

  As described above, in the AT state, the sub CPU 102 determines to shift to the pseudo bonus state, sets the determined pseudo bonus state to the sub gaming state, and stores the special mode storage area at the end of the determined pseudo bonus state. The special mode effect suggesting the special mode set in is executed.

<Processing at the end of the pseudo bonus>
152 and 153 are flowcharts showing the pseudo bonus end time process executed in step S555 of the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 150 and 151.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a value larger than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter (S560). Here, the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103, and when the pseudo bonus type 8 associated with the special pseudo bonus state is won during the pseudo bonus added state. The value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is stored at the time of the hit.

  If it is determined in step S560 that a value greater than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter. The stored value is stored, and the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter is initialized (S561). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 associated with the pseudo bonus added state in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S562), and ends the process at the end of the pseudo bonus. In these processes, since the special pseudo bonus state won during the pseudo bonus extra state has been completed, the sub CPU 102 resumes the pseudo bonus extra state being executed from the next game.

  In the process of step S560, if it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is a pseudo bonus type 7 (S563). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the executed pseudo bonus state is a pseudo bonus added state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S563 that the pseudo bonus type is the pseudo bonus type 7 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus extra state guarantee lottery process (S564). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the value stored in the pseudo bonus extra counter and the ART bonus lottery table at the time of pseudo bonus extra state execution (see FIG. 90), and the AT state is one set in the pseudo bonus extra state. If not stocked, a process of stocking one set is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (S565). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus added state guarantee lottery executed in step S564 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S565 or in the processing of step S563, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not the pseudo bonus type 7 (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus medium addition counter (S566). ). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus extra counter since the pseudo bonus state has ended.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a value larger than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock counter (S567). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is stocked in the pseudo bonus added state in the pseudo bonus state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S567 that a value greater than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 in the pseudo bonus type stock table ( In S568, the pseudo bonus added state stock counter is decremented by 1 (S569), the pseudo bonus transition state is set in the sub game state storage area (S570), and the process at the end of the pseudo bonus is ended. In these processes, the sub CPU 102 changes the added bonus bonus state stocked in the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state to be executed next, reduces the stock by one, and shifts the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus transition state.

  In the process of step S567, when it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus type (S571). In this process, the sub CPU 102 deletes the currently executed pseudo bonus type from the pseudo bonus type stock table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the top value of the pseudo bonus type stock table is greater than 0 (S572). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type is stocked in the pseudo bonus added state stock table.

  If it is determined in the process of step S572 that the top value of the pseudo bonus type stock table is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the top value of the pseudo bonus type stock table as the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is set as (S573). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type stocked in the pseudo bonus type stock table in the pseudo bonus type stock table as a pseudo bonus type to be referred to from the next game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is ON (S574). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub gaming state storage area (S575), and at the end of the pseudo bonus. End the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state in the sub gaming state storage area (S576). Then, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is turned OFF (S577), and the process at the end of the pseudo bonus is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of step S572 that the top value of the pseudo bonus type stock table is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART win / loss set in the ART pass / fail storage area is AT win. It is determined whether or not (S578). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in any of the ART lotteries.

  If it is determined in step S578 that the AT is a win (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub gaming state storage area (S579), and first AT state start pre-processing Is executed (S580). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 starts the first AT state for determining each control information for determining the contents of the effect to be executed in the first AT state starting from the next game and whether or not the AT state is continued. Perform pre-processing.

  As described above, at the time of winning the AT state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the first AT state of the AT state after the end of the pseudo bonus state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the AT state non-winning counter (S581), and ends the pseudo bonus end process. In this process, since the sub CPU 102 has won the AT state, the sub CPU 102 initializes the AT state non-winning counter.

  If it is determined in step S578 that the AT is not winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes other highly-probable transition game number lottery processing, and the corresponding lottery result (high-accuracy counter and Stored in the high-accuracy counter) (S582), the normal gaming state is set in the secondary gaming state storage area (S583), and the process at the end of the pseudo bonus is terminated. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the probability state is made highly or ultra-high in the normal game state started after the end of the pseudo bonus state. Determine by lottery with reference to the table.

  Here, the other highly accurate transition game number lottery tables are five lottery tables similar to the highly accurate transition game number random determination table (see (a) to (d) of FIGS. 43 to 46). The sub CPU 102 refers to the normal mode set in the normal mode storage area, and determines the other highly probable transition game number lottery table to be referenced. In addition, in the other highly probable game number lottery table, each probability state and the number of games in which the probability state continues are associated with different lottery values for each sub game state set in the sub game state storage area. Yes.

<First AT state start pre-processing>
FIG. 154 and FIG. 155 show the state before the start of the first AT state executed in step S580 of the pseudo bonus end time processing shown in FIG. 152 and FIG. 153 and step S738 of the second AT state end processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a process.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special mode is set in the special mode storage area (S590). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the special modes 1 to 6 is set in the special mode stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined in step S590 that the special mode is not set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode 1 in the special mode storage area (S591). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode 1 set in the initial state of the first AT state in the special mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 in the special table information counter (S592). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 as an initial value in a special table information counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes special table lottery processing (S593), and sets the lottery result in the special table number (S594). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 determines a special table with reference to the special table lottery table (see FIG. 62), and the determined special table number is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Set to a number.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the loop lottery state (S595), sets a normal time flag in the first AT state game number lottery state (S596), and sets a normal time flag in the special mode lottery state. Set (S597). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 has each of a loop lottery state, a first AT state game number lottery state, and a special mode lottery state among the AT state flags stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Set the normal time flag to.

  After determining that the special mode is set after executing the process of step S597 or in the process of step S590 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the special mode table by referring to the special mode table reference table. Then, the determined special mode table number is set in the special mode table number (S598). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the special mode table by referring to the special mode table reference table based on the value set in the special table information counter and the value set in the special table number. The determined special mode table number is set in the special mode table number stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery process (S599). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table (FIG. 64 (a), (reference)) based on the flag set in the first AT state game number lottery state. b) see) is determined, and the ART lottery is executed with reference to the determined first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (S600). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus added state guarantee lottery executed in step S599 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a first AT state game number random determination process (S601). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state game number random determination table (see FIG. 99) and determines the first AT state game number that is the number of times that the unit game is executed in the first AT state. To do.

  In this way, the sub CPU 102 determines the first AT state game number in the first AT state start pre-processing that is executed when the pseudo bonus state is shifted to the first AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number determined as a result of the process of step S601 to the first AT state game number counter (S602). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores the determined first AT state game number in the first AT state game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the first AT state game number lottery state (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a special mode transition lottery process at the start of the first AT state (S604). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state start special mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 5) based on the special mode set in the special mode storage area and the flag set in the special mode lottery state. 65 to 73), and the special mode is determined with reference to the determined first AT state start special mode transition lottery table.

  In this way, in the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 has a plurality of second AT state pseudo bonus lottery tables (FIG. 75) having different winning probabilities determined to shift the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus state. 84) When determining the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state to be referred to from each of (a) and (b) of FIG. 84, the special mode to be referred to is at least one of the plurality of special modes. select.

  Further, in the process of step S604, the sub CPU 102 determines the special mode, special mode suggestion effect executed in the first AT state (see FIG. 172), and special mode notification effect executed in the second AT state. (See FIG. 173). Here, the special mode suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the determined special mode. The special mode notification effect is an effect of notifying the determined special mode. Details of the special mode suggestion effect and the special mode notification effect will be described later.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is selected in the second AT state while the special mode suggesting effect suggesting the selected special mode is executed in the first AT state. Since the special mode notification effect for informing the special mode is executed, different effects related to the special mode are executed in the first and second half of one AT state, and the player's expectation for the selected special mode is maintained. be able to.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode determined as a result of the process of step S601 in the special mode storage area (S605). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined special mode in the special mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the special mode lottery state (S606). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is greater than 0 (S607).

  If it is determined in step S607 that the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the special mode 6 flag (S608). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 turns on the special mode 6 flag and sets the special mode 6 in the special mode storage area. Thus, the sub CPU 102 is configured to give priority to the special mode 6 even when the other special modes 1 to 5 are already set.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 decrements the special mode 6 stock counter by 1 (S609). In this processing, since the special mode 6 is set, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of special mode 6 sets set in the special mode 6 stock counter.

  If it is determined in step S607 that the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns off the special mode 6 flag (S610).

  After executing the process of step S609 or step S610, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART loop lottery process (S611). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the flag set in the loop lottery type, the value set in the loop stock counter, the special mode set in the special mode storage area, and the AT continuation type storage area. The ART loop lottery table to be referred (see FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (g)) is determined based on the AT continuation type, and the loop reference stock table is referred to with reference to the determined ART loop lottery table. The ART loop lottery is executed based on the loop rate set in.

  Here, when the set number is set in the loop stock counter, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. It is configured to win any continuation or special continuation. Further, when referring to the ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. 87 (a), the sub CPU 102 wins one of “no continuation”, “continuation”, and “special continuation” according to the loop rate set in the loop reference stock table. It is configured.

  As described above, when the sub CPU 102 executes the continuous transition according to the number of sets stored in the loop stock counter and digests the number of sets stored in the loop stock counter, the loop set in the loop reference stock table. Based on the rate, it is configured to determine whether to perform a continuous transition.

  Thereby, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the ART lottery when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined, and sets the loop rate determined at the non-winning time when the ART lottery is not winning. Since the number can be carried over until the ART lottery is won, when the ART lottery is finally won, an increase in the game loop rate and the number of sets in the AT state can be expected. Even if the AT state does not start after the game is over, the player's interest in the game can be maintained until the player wins the ART lottery, and the player's expectation that the AT state will continue for a long time A game can be played with

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the AT continuation type determined as a result of the process of step S611 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S612). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined AT continuation type in the AT continuation type storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the flag set in the loop lottery state is a normal time flag (S613). In this process, when it is determined that the normal time flag is not set in the loop lottery state (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first AT state start pre-processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S613 that the normal flag is set in the loop lottery state (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the loop stock counter is greater than zero. Is determined (S614). In this process, when it is determined that the value stored in the loop stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first AT state start pre-process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S614 that the value stored in the loop stock counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the loop stock counter. In step S615, the first AT state start pre-processing is terminated.

<Processing during the first AT state>
156 and 157 are flowcharts showing the first AT state processing executed in step S426 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  When executing the first AT state process, the sub CPU 102 executes the special mode suggesting effect determined in step S604 of the first AT state start pre-process (see FIGS. 154 and 155).

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART navigation lottery process (S620). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 61A and 61B) based on the effect game state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 decrements the first AT state game number counter by 1 (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S622). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous processing during the first AT state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S622 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the warning signal process (S623) and is in the first AT state. End the process. In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state in which the promotion lottery is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S622 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S624).

  Next, the sub CPU executes a pseudo bonus type lottery process during the first AT state (S625). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table to be referenced (see FIGS. 74A and 74B) based on the AT probability state set in the AT probability state storage area. ) And a pseudo bonus type lottery is executed with reference to the determined pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S625 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S626). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S627). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is won in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the first AT state executed in step S625.

  If it is determined in the process of step S627 that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 5 Or it is judged whether it is pseudo bonus classification 6 (S628). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag (S629). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S629 or in the process of step S628, when determining that the pseudo bonus type 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. (S630). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter because the pseudo bonus state lottery in the first AT state executed in step S625 has been won.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the same color high-accuracy counter (S631). Here, the same color high accuracy counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 103, and is executed in a state in which the same color high accuracy is set when the sub CPU 102 selects the same color high accuracy as the in-AT probability state. The number of games is stored.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state in the first AT state game number lottery state and the special mode lottery state (S632). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state in the first AT state effect state (S633).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S634). In this process, if it is determined that NO continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the loop lottery state (S635).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S634 that NO continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state to the loop lottery state. Is set (S636).

  In the processing of step S634 to step S636, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state in a state where continuation or special continuation is set as the AT continuation type, the sub CPU 102 is executed after the corresponding pseudo bonus state ends. In step S611 of the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 154 and 155), the continuation or special continuation is surely won.

  After executing the processing of step S635 or step S636, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of first AT state games during the pseudo bonus and turns on the lottery permission flag (S637). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning during the AT state (S638). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table (in the AT state to be referenced) based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage region and the special mode set in the special mode storage region. 85 (a) and 86 (b)) are determined, and the ART lottery is executed with reference to the determined AT bonus pseudo lottery table during the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (639). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus pseudo lottery ART lottery executed in step S638 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  If it is determined in step S627 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the same color high-accuracy counter is greater than zero. Judgment is made (S640). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter ( S641).

  After executing the process of step S641 or in the process of step S640, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high-accuracy counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the same color during the first AT state. A highly accurate lottery process is executed (S642). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and sets the same color accuracy when setting the same color probability as the AT probability state and the AT probability state. The number of games to be executed in the played state is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high accuracy transition lottery executed in step S642 to the corresponding same color high accuracy counter (S643). In this process, when a value is already stored in the same color high accuracy counter, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high accuracy transition lottery executed in step S642 in the first AT state to the already stored value. To do.

  After executing the processing of step S639 or step S643, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S644). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (S645).

  If it is determined in the process of step S645 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state precursor game number lottery process (S646). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and executes the sign game number lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number determined in step S646 is larger than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (S647). In this process, if it is determined that the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S646 is larger than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines The value set in the first AT state game number counter is set in the counter (S648).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S647 that the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S646 is smaller than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (NO), The CPU 102 sets the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S646 to the precursor counter (S649).

  In the processing of step S647 to step S649, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state during the first AT state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus state through a relatively small number of precursor states. To do.

  If it is determined in step S645 that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 displays the BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 when the normal replay is won. It is determined whether or not to perform push order navigation that can be performed (S650). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) to determine whether or not to execute a push order navigation that can display the BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 at the time of normal replay winning. .

  In the process of step S650, if it is determined that the push order navigation is not executed as a result of lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S651).

  When it is determined in the process of step S644 that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES) or in the process of step S650, when it is determined that push order navigation is to be executed as a result of lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 Initializes the precursor counter (S652).

  After executing the processing of step S648, step S649 or step S652, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S653). ). In this process, when it is determined that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0. (S654). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the first AT state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S654 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes state transition common processing at the end of precursor shown in FIG. S655), the first AT state processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of step S653 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value set in the first AT state game number counter to 0. It is determined whether or not there is (S656). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the first AT state game number counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S656 that the value set in the first AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the special table information counter (S657). ), The second AT state is set in the auxiliary gaming state storage area (S658), and the processing in the first AT state is terminated. In these processes, since the first AT state game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines that all the unit games executed in the first AT state have ended, and adds 1 to the special table information counter. At the same time, the second AT state is started from the next game.

  Thus, in the first AT state, when the sub CPU 102 executes the unit game of the first AT state game number determined in the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 154 and 155), The sub gaming state is shifted to the second AT state of the AT states.

<Processing during the second AT state>
158 to 160 are flowcharts showing the second AT state process executed in step S428 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  When the second AT state process is executed, the sub CPU 102 executes the special mode notification effect determined in step S604 of the first AT state start pre-process (see FIGS. 154 and 155).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (S660). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the second AT state game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is zero.

  If it is determined in the process of step S660 that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state initial process (S661). ). In this process, since the second AT state game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 is the first time that the second AT state game number is not yet set after the end of the first AT state. And the second AT state initial process for determining the contents of the second AT state game and the contents of the effect executed in the second AT state.

  After executing the process of step S661 or in the process of step S660, if it is determined that a value other than 0 is set in the second AT state game number counter (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the ART navigation lottery. The process is executed (S662). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 61A and 61B) based on the effect game state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 decrements the second AT state game number counter by 1 (S663). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S664). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous processing during the second AT state.

  If it is determined in step S664 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S665).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus type lottery process during the second AT state, and sets the result of the executed pseudo bonus type lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S666). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery to be referred to based on the special mode set in the special mode storage area and the in-AT probability state storage area. A table (see FIGS. 75 to 84) is determined, and a pseudo bonus type lottery is executed with reference to the determined pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus state based on the winning probability set in the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state determined based on the special mode set by the sub CPU 102. Decide whether or not to do.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of second AT state pseudo bonus lotteries with different winning probabilities determined to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state. Transition to the pseudo bonus state when a plurality of special modes that are determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state with a high probability are selected. Since the probability of being determined is extremely high, it is possible to increase the expectation that the player can win the pseudo-bonus state even during the AT state, and it is possible to concentrate on the game even during the AT state. Can be improved.

  Further, as shown in steps S625 and S666, in the first AT state and the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 among the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 or not. Is determined by lottery.

  With this configuration, when the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the pseudo bonus state in the AT state, the pachislot machine 1 enters the pseudo bonus added state in which the number of sets in the AT state is added each time the pseudo bonus transition symbol is won. Since it is possible to shift to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state having the possibility of shifting, it is possible to make the player interested in the change of the gaming state in the AT state, and to further improve the interest in the game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S667). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the second AT state executed in step S666.

  If it is determined in the process of step S667 that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 5 Or it is judged whether it is pseudo bonus classification 6 (S668). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag (S669). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S669 or in the process of step S668, when determining that the pseudo bonus type 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. (S670). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter because the pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state executed in step S666 has been won.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the same color high-accuracy counter (S671). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state in the special mode lottery state (S672). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state in the first AT state effect state (S673).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S674). In this process, if it is determined that NO continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the loop lottery state (S675).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S674 that NO continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state to the loop lottery state. Is set (S676).

  In the processing of step S674 to step S676, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state in a state where continuation or special continuation is set as the AT continuation type, the sub CPU 102 is executed after the corresponding pseudo bonus state ends. In step S611 of the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 154 and 155), the continuation or special continuation is surely won.

  After executing the process of step S675 or step S676, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of first AT state games during the pseudo bonus and turns the lottery permission flag ON (S677). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning during the AT state (S678). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table (in the AT state to be referenced) based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage region and the special mode set in the special mode storage region. 85 (a) and 86 (b)) are determined, and the ART lottery is executed with reference to the determined AT bonus pseudo lottery table during the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (679). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus pseudo lottery ART lottery executed in step S678 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuation game number counter is larger (S680). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuation game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is greater than zero.

  If it is determined in step S680 that a value greater than 0 is set in the special continuation game number counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes ART lottery processing when a special condition is satisfied (S681). In this process, the sub CPU 102 makes a transition from the next game to the precursor state or the pseudo bonus state from the second AT state, that is, the second AT state ends in the current game, and the number of special continued games. Since the counter is not 0, it is determined that the special condition is satisfied, and the ART lottery when the special condition is satisfied is executed with reference to the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied (see FIG. 89). In addition, when executing the process of step S681, the sub CPU 102 executes a special effect which is a continuous notification mode selected when the special condition is satisfied, and notifies that the AT state is continuously shifted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (S682). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART lottery executed when the special condition is executed in step S <b> 681 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  As shown in Step S667 and Step S680 to Step S682, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied when the special effect is executed and it is determined to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state. The loop rate is determined, and the determined loop rate is stocked in the loop reference stock table.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is informed of the continuation notification mode selected when the special condition is satisfied, thereby notifying the player of the winning of the pseudo bonus state and the AT Since it is suggested that the loop rate of the state is newly stored, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect mode executed in the AT state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  If it is determined in step S667 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the same color high-accuracy counter is greater than zero. Judgment is made (S683). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter ( S684).

  After executing the process of step S684 or in the process of step S683, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high-accuracy counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the same color during the second AT state. A highly accurate lottery process is executed (S685). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and sets the same color accuracy when setting the same color probability as the AT probability state and the AT probability state. The number of games to be executed in the played state is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high accuracy transition lottery executed in step S685 to the corresponding same color high accuracy counter (S686). In this process, if a value is already stored in the same color high accuracy counter, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high accuracy transition lottery executed in step S685 in the second AT state to the already stored value. To do.

  After executing the processing of step S682 or step S686, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S687). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (S688).

  If it is determined in the process of step S688 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state precursor game number lottery process (S689). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and executes the sign game number lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number determined in step S689 is larger than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (S690). In this process, when it is determined that the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S689 is larger than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines The value set in the second AT state game number counter is set in the counter (S691).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S690 that the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S689 is smaller than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (NO), The CPU 102 sets the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S689 in the precursor counter (S692).

  In the processing of step S690 to step S692, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state during the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus state via a relatively small number of precursor states. To do.

  If it is determined in step S688 that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 displays the BAR symbol in the middle of the reel display window 4 when the normal replay is won. It is determined whether or not to perform push order navigation that can be performed (S693). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) to determine whether or not to execute a push order navigation that can display the BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 at the time of normal replay winning. .

  In the process of step S693, if it is determined that the push order navigation is not executed as a result of lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S694).

  If it is determined in the process of step S687 that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES) or if it is determined in the process of step S693 that push order navigation is executed as a result of lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 Initializes the precursor counter (S695).

  After executing the processing of step S691, step S692, or step S695, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S696). ). In this process, when it is determined that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0. (S697). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S697 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter (S698). The continuation game number counter is initialized (S699), the state transition common process at the end of the precursor shown in FIG. 147 is executed (S700), and the second AT state process ends. In this process, since the sub game state becomes any one of the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus promotion game state, or the pseudo bonus transition state from the next game, the second CPU state counter and the number of special continuation games The counter is initialized and the state transition common process at the end of the precursor is executed.

  If it is determined in step S696 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value set in the second AT state game number counter to 0. It is determined whether or not there is (S701). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state end process (S702). Then, the processing during the second AT state is terminated. In this process, when the continuation or special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub gaming state storage area after the end of the second AT state. The process at the end of the AT state is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 is set in the special continuous game number counter. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (S703). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S703 that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 decrements the special continuation game number counter by 1 (S704). In this process, the sub CPU 102 decrements the special continuation game number counter by 1 because one unit game has been executed with the special continuation set in the AT continuation type storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuation game number counter is 0 (S705). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S705 that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets continuation in the AT continuation type storage area (S706). Then, the processing during the second AT state is terminated. In this process, since the value set in the second AT state game number counter is greater than 0 and the value set in the special continuation game number counter becomes 0, the sub CPU 102 Since the special effect is not executed in the second AT state being executed, the continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, and the effect executed in the state where the special continuation is set is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of step S664 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a warning signal process (S707). In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state in which the promotion lottery is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (S708). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S708 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter (S709) The continuation game number counter is initialized (S710), and the second AT state processing is terminated. In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter and the special continuation game number counter because the sub gaming state becomes a precursor state from the next game.

<Second AT state initial processing>
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the second AT state initial process executed in step S661 of the second AT state process shown in FIGS.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S720). In this process, if it is determined that special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes special continuation special mode transition lottery processing (S721), and determines the lottery result. The special mode storage area is set (S722).

  In the processing of step S720 to step S722, when the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special continuation special mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 88) and refers to the current special mode. A special continuation special mode transition lottery is executed, which has a possibility of selecting a special mode more advantageous to the player than the special mode set in the storage area, and the lottery result is set in the special mode storage area.

  After executing the process of step S722 or in the process of step S720, if it is determined that the special continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the second AT state game number lottery. Processing is executed (S723). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the second AT state game number lottery table to be referred to based on the AT continuation type set in the AT continuation type storage area and the special mode set in the special mode storage area (see FIG. 101 to 106), and the second AT state game number lottery table is determined to determine the second AT state game number that is the number of times the unit game is executed in the second AT state. To do.

  In this manner, the sub CPU 102 determines the second AT state game number in the second AT state initial process executed when the first AT state is shifted to the second AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the second AT state game number determined as a result of the process of step S723 in the second AT state game number counter (S724). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores the determined second AT state game number in the second AT state game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S725). In this process, if it is determined that special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes special continuation game number lottery processing (S726), and the result of lottery is special continuation. The game number counter is set (S727), and the second AT state initial process ends.

  In the processing of step S725 to step S727, when the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 executes a special continuation game number lottery with reference to a probability table (not shown), and results of the lottery Is set in the special continuation game number counter to determine how many games to execute in the second AT state to be executed in the state where special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area. .

  If it is determined in step S725 that the special continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the special continuation game number counter (S728), and the second AT state. End the initial process.

<Second AT state end processing>
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a second AT state end time process executed in step S702 of the second AT state in-process shown in FIGS.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT continuation type set in the AT continuation type storage area is winning or special winning (S730). In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state as a result of the ART loop lottery executed in step S611 of the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 154 and 155). It is determined whether or not the AT continuation type for continuing the AT state or the special continuation is won.

  If it is determined in step S730 that NO continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 deletes the top loop rate of the loop reference stock table (S731). In this process, since the sub CPU 102 has executed the ART loop lottery based on the loop rate set at the head of the loop reference stock table in step S611 of the first AT state start pre-processing, Delete the loop rate set at the beginning.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the loop reference set at the head of the loop reference stock table is any of the loop references 1 to 5 (S732). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a loop reference that has not yet been used for the ART loop lottery remains in the loop reference stock table.

  In the process of step S730, when it is determined that the winning or special winning is made in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), or in the process of step S732, any one of the loop references 1 to 5 is added to the head of the loop reference stock table. If it is determined that it is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub gaming state storage area (S733). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a continuous transition to set the first AT state in the sub gaming state storage area in order to start the first AT state from the next game after the end of the second AT state. After the end of the second AT state, the first AT state can be executed and the AT state can be continued.

  Thus, when the unit game of the second AT state game number is executed, the sub CPU 102 continues the AT state by continuously shifting the sub game state to the first AT state.

  Also, in the processing of step S731 to step S733, when a plurality of loop rates are stocked in the loop reference stock table at the start of the second AT state end processing, the sub CPU 102 relates to the stocked loop rates. It is configured to perform continuous migration.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can give a lot of benefits to the player when a plurality of loop rates are stored in the loop reference stock table of the sub RAM 103. Can be improved.

  Moreover, when performing the process of step S733, sub CPU102 is comprised so that the continuous alerting | reporting aspect which alert | reports that an AT state continues as a continuing alerting | reporting aspect is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the first AT state effect state (S734). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuation game number counter is greater than 0 (S735).

  If it is determined in the process of step S735 that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process when the special condition is satisfied (S736). In this process, the sub CPU 102 makes a transition from the next game to the first AT state from the second AT state, that is, the second AT state ends in the current game, and the special continued game number counter Is not 0, it is determined that the special condition is satisfied, and the ART lottery is executed when the special condition is satisfied.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (737). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART lottery executed when the special condition is executed in step S736 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  After executing the process of step S737 or in the process of step S735, when determining that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 starts the first AT state. Pre-processing is executed (S738), and the processing at the end of the second AT state ends. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines each control information for determining the content of the effect to be executed in the first AT state starting from the next game and whether or not the AT state is continued before the first AT state starts. Execute the process.

  In the process of step S732, if it is determined that none of the loop references 1 to 5 is set at the head of the loop reference stock table (NO), the sub CPU 102 notifies the success or failure of the AT state. And the common process at the end of the AT state are executed (S739), and the second AT state end process is terminated. In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a common process at the end of the AT state for initializing the flag and value stored in each storage area in order to start the normal game state from the next game.

  As in the processing of step S681, step S733, and step S739, the sub CPU 102 executes any one of a plurality of continuation notification modes that notify the continuation or non-continuation of the AT state.

<Common processing at the end of ART>
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a common process at the end of ART executed in step S739 of the second AT state end process shown in FIG. 162.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state in the sub game state storage area (S740). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state in the sub game state storage area in order to start the normal game state from the next game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus counter, the special table number, the special mode table number, the special mode storage area, the special table information counter, and the same color high accuracy counter (S741). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes each flag and value set in the pseudo bonus state and the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal mode lottery table lottery process at the end of AT (S742). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the normal mode reference table lottery table at the end of AT (see (a) and (b) of FIGS. 41 and 42) in the normal game state starting from the next game. The AT end normal mode lottery table lottery for determining the table to be executed is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the AT end normal mode lottery table lottery executed in step S742 in a table stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S743).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes normal mode number determination processing (S744), and sets the normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number (S745). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 determines the normal mode number from the currently set table and the value set in the AT state non-winning number counter with reference to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 40). The normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number is set in the normal mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes other high-probability transition game number lottery processing (S746), stores the lottery results in the corresponding counters (high-precision counter and ultra-high-precision counter) (S747), and ends the AT. End common processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the probability state in the normal game state starting from the next game is higher or higher probability than at the start of the normal game state. A lottery is determined by referring to the lottery table.

<Processing during pseudo bonus promotion game state>
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process executed in step S430 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the old sub gaming state is a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (S750). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus promotion game state by determining whether or not the old sub game state is the pseudo bonus promotion game state. To do.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the old secondary gaming state is not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets 10 in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter (S751). In this process, since the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus promotion game state, the sub CPU 102 stores the pseudo bonus promotion that stores the number of games in the pseudo bonus promotion game state stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. 10 is set as the predetermined number of games in the game state game number counter.

  After executing the process of step S751 or in the process of step S750, if it is determined that the old subsidiary gaming state is the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 counts the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter. It is determined whether or not the set value is greater than 0 (S752). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 decrements the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter by 1 (S753). ).

  On the other hand, in the process of step S752, when it is determined that the value set in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning order bell has been won. Judgment is made (S754). In this process, if it is determined that the push order bell is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag to ON. Here, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is a flag that is referred to in the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 166), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined in step S753, step S755 or step S754 that the push order bell has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes an ART navigation lottery process (S756). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 61A and 61B) based on the effect game state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is executed. In this process, when the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON, the sub CPU 102 executes only the push order navigation related to the first stop operation among the decided push order navigations.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S757). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines each (d) of FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. ), The pseudo bonus promotion lottery process is executed, and the result of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. . Here, since the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in each of (d) of FIGS. 49 and 50, whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion lottery substantially wins the pseudo bonus type 7 or not. It will be a lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S758). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion lottery is won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S757.

  If it is determined in step S758 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning combination is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S758 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery win is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter (S759). In this processing, since the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo bonus type 7, the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of pseudo bonus promotion game state games in order to end the pseudo bonus promotion game state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table (S760). In this processing, since the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo bonus type 7, the sub bonus 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S761). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning during pseudo bonus winning (S762). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process with reference to the ART bonus lottery table during the pseudo bonus winning (see FIG. 57).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 145 (S763). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus lottery during pseudo bonus winning executed in step S <b> 762 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus state in the sub gaming state storage area (S764), and ends the process during the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state. In this process, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus type 7 during the pseudo bonus promotion game state process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state from the pseudo bonus promotion game state to the pseudo bonus state.

<Common processing at game start>
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the game start common process executed in step S422 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (S770). In this process, when it is determined that the sub gaming state is the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON (S771).

  If it is determined in the processing of step S771 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the value set in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter in the previous game. Is 0 and the winning order bell is won, and the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state winning process (see FIG. 170) executed in step S785 of the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 166) is executed. Since the sequence error has not occurred, it is determined that the end condition is satisfied, and the pseudo bonus transition state is set in the sub game state storage area (S772).

  By the process of step S772, the sub CPU 102 executes a predetermined game in a state in which a unit game of 10 games is executed as a predetermined number of games in the pseudo bonus promotion game state, When a sequence error in which a winning operation command is not received as a command occurs, it is determined that the end condition is satisfied, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is terminated, and the sub gaming state can be shifted to the pseudo bonus transition state.

  After executing the process of step S772, if it is determined in the process of step S770 that the secondary gaming state is not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (NO), or the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is OFF in the process of step S771. If it is determined (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the premier flag has been won (S773). In this process, if it is determined that the premier flag has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the common process at the start of the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S773 that the premier flag has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the normal penalty counter (S774), sets the normal penalty flag to OFF (S775), and the pseudo bonus penalty. The counter is initialized (S776), the pseudo bonus transition flag is turned OFF (S777), and the game start common process is terminated.

  In the processing from step S774 to step S777, the sub CPU 102 is configured to initialize each flag and counter in order to eliminate the penalty state when the premier flag is won.

<Process when receiving a winning action command>
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a winning action command reception process executed in step S411 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the normal gaming state (S780). In this process, if it is determined that the secondary gaming state is the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a normal penalty winning process (S781) and ends the winning operation command receiving process. Here, in the normal mid-time penalty winning process, the sub CPU 102 maintains the normal penalty when the normal game state continues in the next game and the first stop operation is executed on the left stop button 19L in the current game. A process of subtracting the counter and a penalty winning process described later (see FIG. 168) are executed.

  If it is determined in step S780 that the secondary gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the secondary gaming state is a pseudo bonus transition state (S782). In this process, if it is determined that the sub game state is the pseudo bonus transition state (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus transition state winning process (S783), and ends the winning operation command receiving process. To do. Here, in the pseudo bonus transition state winning process, the sub CPU 102 performs a normal penalty counter subtraction process, and a process of transitioning the sub gaming state from the pseudo bonus transition state to the pseudo bonus state when a specific condition is satisfied. Then, a penalty winning process described later (see FIG. 168) is executed.

  If it is determined in step S782 that the secondary gaming state is not the pseudo bonus transition state (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the secondary gaming state is the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (S784). . In this process, when it is determined that the sub game state is not the pseudo bonus promotion game state (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process upon receiving a winning action command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S784 that the sub gaming state is the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state winning process (S785), and a winning operation is performed. Terminates command reception processing. Here, in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state winning process, the sub CPU 102 continues the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state when winning the eight-bell role while the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON. Execute.

<Normal penalty handling process>
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the normal penalty winning time process executed in step S781 of the winning action command receiving time process shown in FIG. 166.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type is 0, the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, and whether the first stop operation has been performed on the left stop button 19L ( S790). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is 0, the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0, and the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 19L (YES) In the current game, the sub CPU 102 wins a “no transition” in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery (see step S444 in FIG. 142), and the first stop operation is the left stop button. At 19L, it is determined that the player has operated the stop button as the game progresses in advance, and 1 is subtracted from the value normally set in the penalty counter (S791).

  After executing the process of step S791 or in the process of step S790, if the pseudo bonus type is not 0, the value set in the normal penalty counter is 0, and the first stop operation is other than the left stop button 19L If it is determined that it is at least one of the executed cases (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a penalty winning process (S792) and ends the normal penalty winning process. Here, in the penalty winning process, in the current game, the sub CPU 102 performs the first stop operation other than the left stop button 19L in a state where the push order navigation is not executed, and wins the 8 bell combination. In addition, processing for generating a penalty state is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 does not execute the process of step S791 because any one of 1 to 8 is set as the pseudo bonus type when the precursor state is set to the sub gaming state. It is configured. That is, the sub CPU 102 is configured not to count the number of times the unit game is executed in the penalty state by not subtracting the value of the normal penalty counter in the precursor state.

  Thereby, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not count the number of unit games executed in the penalty state when the secondary gaming state is the precursor state, and is disadvantageous before or during the precursor state. The penalty state that occurs when the condition is satisfied is maintained even after the precursor state ends, and by executing the first to sixth penalties according to the secondary gaming state, the penalty state with different contents of disadvantages Can be executed.

  Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured by the first to sixth penalties whose contents differ depending on the secondary gaming state even when the penalty condition occurs and the penalty condition occurs. By executing the penalty state, the player can have a sense of expectation for the transition to the pseudo bonus state, the player can be prevented from stopping the game, and the player can gain profits illegally. Can be prevented.

<Penalty winning process>
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the penalty winning time process executed in step S792 of the normal penalty winning time process shown in FIG. 167 and the step S822 of the pseudo bonus transition state winning time process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning combination of 8 bells has been won (S800). In this process, if it is determined that a winning combination of 8 bells has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the push order navigation has been lottery and the push order navigation has been executed (S801).

  If it is determined in step S801 that the push order navigation is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first stop operation is executed on the left stop button 19L (S802). In this process, if it is determined that the first stop operation has not been performed on the left stop button 19L (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that a predetermined disadvantageous condition has been satisfied, and the total penalty occurrence counter is set to 1. Is added (S803), and 3 is added to the normal penalty counter as a specific number of games (S804). Here, the total penalty occurrence counter is stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103 and stores the number of times a penalty state has occurred since the main power supply was turned on.

  Further, through the processing of Steps S800 to S802 and Step S804, the sub CPU 102 executes the first stop operation other than the left stop button 19L in a state where the push order navigation is not executed among the predetermined disadvantageous conditions. When a winning combination of 8 bells is won, a penalty state can be generated by adding a value to the normal penalty counter.

  Here, when a predetermined disadvantageous condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 102 counts the number of times that the predetermined disadvantageous condition is satisfied by adding 1 to the penalty total occurrence counter.

  After executing the process of step S804, if it is determined in the process of step S800 that the eight-bell winning combination has not been won (NO), or if it is determined that the push order navigation has been executed in the process of step S801 (YES) ) Or when it is determined in step S802 that the first stop operation has been performed on the left stop button 19L (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value set in the normal penalty counter is greater than 10 or not. Is determined (S805). In this process, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the value set in the normal penalty counter is larger than 10 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets 10 in the normal penalty counter (S806).

  By the processing of step S806, even if the disadvantageous condition is continuously satisfied, the sub CPU 102 does not increase the number of games in which the penalty state continues to be more than 10 games, and thus gives an excessive penalty to the player, Can prevent the interest of

  After executing the process of step S806 or in the process of step S805, if it is determined that the value set in the normal penalty counter is 10 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the normal penalty flag to OFF ( S807), the penalty winning process is terminated. With this process, the sub CPU 102 can execute a process upon receiving a winning action command, and can determine in the next game that no sequence error has occurred due to not receiving a winning action command in the current game.

  Here, as shown in step S470 of step S800 to step S802, step S804 and step S470 of the normal penalty process (see FIG. 144), the sub CPU 102 selects one of a plurality of predetermined disadvantageous conditions. When that is true, a value is set in the normal penalty counter, and a penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player is executed.

<Pseudo bonus transition state winning process>
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus transition state winning time process executed in step S783 of the winning action command receiving process shown in FIG. 166.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0 (S810). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the normal penalty counter is other than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first stop operation has been performed on the left stop button 19L. (S811).

  If it is determined in step S811 that the first stop operation has been performed on the left stop button 19L (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the normal penalty counter (S812). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has operated the stop button as the game progresses in advance in a state where a penalty state has occurred, and sets the value normally set in the penalty counter. Subtract 1

  Here, in the process of step S812 and the process of step S791 of the normal penalty-winning process (see FIG. 167), the sub CPU 102 executes the number of times that the unit game is executed when the value is set in the normal penalty counter. Is subtracted from the normal penalty counter to count the number of unit games executed in the penalty state when the penalty state is being executed.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102 determines that the specific number of games is reached when the value set in the normal penalty counter becomes 0 by the process of step S812 and the process of step S791 of the normal penalty winning process (see FIG. 167). It is determined that it is counted that the unit game has been executed, and the penalty state is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S810 that the value set in the normal penalty counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a normal replay in which a pseudo bonus transition combination is performed. Is determined (S813).

  If it is determined in the process of step S813 that the normal replay is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus start lock is executed by the main CPU 93 (S814). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the simulation executed when the game lock effect executed by the main CPU 93 wins the normal replay, the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 19L, and no penalty is generated. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the bonus is started is received.

  If it is determined in the process of step S814 that the main CPU 93 has executed the pseudo bonus start lock (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub gaming state storage area (S815).

  Through the processes in steps S814 and S815, the sub CPU 102 can notify the player that the pseudo bonus state starts from the next game while the pseudo bonus start lock is being executed. For this reason, the sub CPU 102 does not recognize that the pseudo bonus transition combination is not a so-called bonus combination, so that the player sees the winning combination and the pseudo bonus state starts from the next game, and operates the start lever 23. By performing the lock at the start of the pseudo bonus by the main CPU 93, it is possible to execute an effect informing the start of the pseudo bonus state.

  In this way, during the RT1 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus transition role in a state of winning the pseudo bonus state as a plurality of predetermined specific conditions, and the lock at the start of the pseudo bonus is performed. When the condition of being executed is satisfied, the sub game state is shifted to the pseudo bonus state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the above conditions, the predetermined specific types of specific conditions include winning the pseudo bonus type 8 and the pseudo bonus in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process shown in FIG. In the promotion lottery (see step S757), it is constituted by winning the pseudo bonus type 7.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area (S816). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets one of the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected by the player in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area.

  Thus, the sub CPU 102 determines which of the plurality of pseudo bonus selection effects prepared in advance is selected by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect as a selection effect executed during a game in the pseudo bonus state based on the pseudo bonus selection effect set in step S816.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus selection effect set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area is the first pseudo bonus selection effect or the second pseudo bonus selection effect (S817). . In this process, if it is determined that the first pseudo bonus selection effect or the second pseudo bonus selection effect is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the notification timing flag to ON (S818), and the notification timing. The lottery process is executed, and the value associated with the lottery result is set in the notification timing counter (S819).

  In the process of step S819, when the first pseudo bonus selection effect is set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area, the sub CPU 102 refers to it based on the loop rate set in the loop rate stock counter. The first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table (see FIGS. 107 and 108 (a) to (c)) is determined, and the determined first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table is referred to. Then, the notification timing lottery is executed.

  In the process of step S819, the sub CPU 102 determines that the second pseudo bonus selection effect is set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area based on the set value set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 95. Then, a second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table (see (a) to (c) in FIGS. 109 and 110) to be referred to is determined, and the determined second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing is determined. Referring to the lottery table, the notification timing lottery is executed.

  Thus, sub CPU102 determines the timing which performs AT state notification effect.

  After determining that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is set after executing the process of step S819 or in the process of step S817 (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns the pseudo bonus transition flag OFF ( S820). With this process, the sub CPU 102 can execute a process upon receiving a winning action command, and can determine in the next game that no sequence error has occurred due to not receiving a winning action command in the current game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 in the pseudo bonus penalty counter (S821). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus penalty counter as the sub gaming state shifts from the pseudo bonus transition state to the pseudo bonus state.

  After performing the process of step S812 or step S821, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the first stop operation has been performed for other than the left stop button 19L (NO), the winning combination is a pseudo bonus in the process of step S813. When it is determined that it is not a transitional combination (NO) or in the process of step S814, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock at the start of the pseudo bonus is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a penalty winning process ( 168) is executed, and the pseudo bonus transition state winning process is terminated.

<Pseudo bonus promotion game state winning process>
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state winning process executed in step S785 of the winning operation command receiving process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON (S830). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is set. In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state winning process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S830 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning combination is pressed (S831). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in the pressing order for winning the eight-bell role in the winning pressing order bell.

  If it is determined in the process of step S831 that the winning order is not the order in which the eight-bell combination is won (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub gaming state storage area. (S832).

  After executing the process of step S832, or in the process of step S831, if it is determined that the pressing order of the winning combination is the pressing order for winning the 8 bell combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the pseudo bonus promotion game The state end flag is turned OFF (S833), and the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state winning process is ended. With this process, the sub CPU 102 can execute a process upon receiving a winning action command, and can determine in the next game that no sequence error has occurred due to not receiving a winning action command in the current game.

  By the process during the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state shown in FIG. 164 and the processes at steps S831 to S833, the sub CPU 102 executes 10 unit games in which the process during the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state ends, The winning condition for ending the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is established when the player wins the bell and fails to win the eight-bell role.

  In other words, the sub CPU 102 keeps winning the eight bells even after executing 10 unit games in which the process during the pseudo bonus promotion game state ends, so that the player is in the pseudo bonus promotion game state. Can continue.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the promotion of the pseudo bonus by winning the 8 bell combination even if the unit game is executed 10 times in the pseudo bonus promotion game state. Since the gaming state can be continued, it is possible to further improve the interest in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state.

  The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is obtained by the processing in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state shown in FIG. 164 and the processing in steps S831 to S833 and the processing in steps S770 to S772 of the common processing at the start of gaming shown in FIG. In the pseudo bonus promotion game state in which the possibility of shifting to the pseudo bonus addition state increases as the number of executions of the unit game increases, the player performs cheating after the execution of the ten unit games, and in the pseudo bonus promotion game state When an attempt is made to increase the number of executions of a unit game, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state can be immediately ended, so that it is possible to prevent the player from gaining illegal profits.

  As described above, the end condition is that 10 unit games in which the process during the pseudo bonus promotion game state ends is executed, and in the state where the winning order bell is won as an internal winning combination, it is not possible to win the 8-bell winning combination. And when a sequence error occurs because no winning operation command is received.

<Power interruption processing>
FIG. 171 shows an interrupt output to the sub CPU 102 when a voltage drop is detected by a rough power interruption detection circuit (not shown) provided on the sub control board 72 when the main power supply of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off. 5 is a flowchart showing a power interruption generation process that is executed when an NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) is generated in a sub CPU by a signal.

  The sub CPU 102 acquires the current date and time from the RTC, and stores the acquired current date and time in a power-off date and time storage area stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S840). By this processing, the sub CPU 102 can store the date and time when the main power supply of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off in the power-off date and time storage area. The sub-RAM 103 includes a DRAM for various operations (not shown) and an SRAM (not shown) that can retain stored data even when the main power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off. A battery (not shown) that can hold SRAM data is connected even when the main power supply of the machine 1 is off, and a power-off date / time storage area is assigned to a predetermined area of the SRAM.

<Special mode suggestion>
FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating a special mode suggestion effect executed by the sub CPU 102 when the pseudo bonus state is shifted to during the first AT state and during the AT state, and at the end of the shifted pseudo bonus state.

  As shown in FIG. 172, the special mode suggestion effect is performed by the main CPU 102 performing the first AT state start pre-processing (in accordance with the combination of characters displayed in the left character display area 11L and the right character display area 11R of the liquid crystal display device 11). This suggests which special mode is set in the special mode storage area in step S604 of FIGS. 154 and 155). Here, the character combinations displayed in the character display areas 11L and 11R are determined with reference to the character combination table shown in FIG.

  For example, when the special mode 2 is set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 displays the character “Saburo” in the left character display area 11L and the character “Fukuko” in the right character display area 11R.

  When the character “Saburo” is displayed in the left character display area 11L and the character “Fukuko” is displayed in the right character display area 11R, the player can select special mode 2, special mode 2, and special mode as special modes. 3, special mode 2 and special mode 4, special mode 2, special mode 3 and special mode 4 can be recognized.

  Thus, the sub CPU 102 can suggest the special mode set in the special mode storage area by the combination of characters displayed in the character display areas 11L and 11R.

  Here, special modes 2 and 3, special modes 2 and 4, special modes 3 and 4, special modes 2, special modes 3 and 4 are special modes. When set in the mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state, and the special mode suggesting effect to be executed at the end of the transitioned pseudo bonus state, and the end of the transitioned pseudo bonus state A special mode suggestion effect that is different from a special mode suggestion effect that is executed during the first AT state that is executed later is configured to be executed.

  For example, when the special mode 2 and the special mode 3 are set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state and executes the special mode suggestion executed at the end of the transitioned pseudo bonus state. In the production, the character “Saburo” is displayed in the left character display area 11L, the character “Fukuko” is displayed in the right character display area 11R, and the first AT state executed after the transition to the pseudo bonus state is completed. In the special mode suggestion effect to be executed, the character “Jiro” is displayed in the left character display area 11L, and the character “Kotoko” is displayed in the right character display area 11R.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of special modes are set in the special mode storage area, at the end of the pseudo bonus state determined to shift to the AT state, Since the special mode suggestion effect suggesting the special mode executed in the first AT state is different from that at the time of execution of the first AT state, the player can be watched until the end of the pseudo bonus state, and at the end of the pseudo bonus state, When the execution of the first AT state is different from the performance that suggests the special mode to be executed, it is determined that a plurality of special modes are selected. Can be improved.

<Special mode notification production>
FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating a special mode notification effect executed by the sub CPU 102 during the second AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 173, the special mode notification effect is produced by the main CPU 102 performing the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 154 and 155) by the symbols displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c of the liquid crystal display device 11. In step S604, the special mode set in the special mode storage area is notified. Here, combinations of symbols displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c are determined with reference to a symbol combination table shown in FIG.

  For example, when the special mode 2 is set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode notification area 11a to green and displays the symbol “A”.

  When the special mode notification area 11a turns green and the symbol “A” is displayed, the player can recognize that the special mode 2 is selected as the special mode.

  In this manner, the sub CPU 102 can notify the special mode set in the special mode storage area by the combination of characters displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c.

<Character combination table>
In the special mode suggestion effect, the character combination table shown in FIG. 174 is obtained when the character combinations displayed in the character display areas 11L and 11R (see FIG. 172) of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the character combinations are displayed. Shows special modes that may be set in the special mode storage area.

  For example, when the character “Jiro” is displayed in the left character display area 11L and the character “Kotoko” is displayed in the right character display area 11R, the sub CPU 102 performs special mode in which “◯” in FIG. 174 is associated. 3, special mode 2 and special mode 3, special mode 3 and special mode 4, special mode 2, special mode 3 and special mode 4 are set in the special mode storage area.

<Symbol combination table>
The symbol combination table shown in FIG. 175 displays the combinations of colors and symbols displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c (see FIG. 173) of the liquid crystal display device 1 and the colors and symbols in the special mode notification effect. In this case, the special mode set in the special mode storage area is shown.

  For example, when the special mode display area 11a turns yellow and the symbol “B” is displayed, the sub CPU 102 sets only the special mode 3 in the special mode storage area as shown in FIG.

[Outline of pachislot game information service]
Next, the game information providing service will be described. The game information providing service is a service that provides the player with game contents (game history) from when the player starts to play until a certain point in time. The game information providing service is performed by a game information providing system including the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 176, the gaming information providing system S as a gaming machine management system includes a pachislot machine 1 and a portable communication terminal 400 with a camera as a communication terminal possessed by the player (hereinafter referred to as “mobile terminal”). And a game information management server 500 as a server device. In the example of FIG. 176, one mobile terminal 400 is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, the game information management server 500 can be accessed from a large number of mobile terminals 400. The portable terminal 400 and the game information management server 500 can exchange data with each other via the network NW, for example, using TCP / IP as a communication protocol. The network NW is constructed by, for example, the Internet, a dedicated communication line (for example, a CATV (Community Antenna Television) line), a mobile communication network (including a base station), a gateway, and the like. The pachislot machine 1 is not connected to the network NW.

  Note that the mobile terminal 400 and the game information management server 500 are each provided with a control unit, a storage unit, a display unit, a communication unit, and the like, although not particularly illustrated.

  The sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 records the game content after the player starts the game in the sub RAM 103 and the like, and the player tries to acquire game information indicating the game content during the game or at the end of the game In such a case, game information is provided via the game information management server 500.

  When providing the game information providing service, the sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 displays the two-dimensional code 300 on the liquid crystal display area 11a as a display unit so that the player (portable terminal 400) accesses the game information management server 500. Let Specifically, when the player starts the game, when the player tries to acquire game information in the middle of the game, and when the player tries to acquire game information at the end of the game, Each of the two-dimensional codes 300 is displayed. The two-dimensional code 300 is obtained by converting transmission information described later.

  The transmission information when the player starts the game includes information related to the domain of the game information management server 500, log-in number information indicating the log-in number from power-on, and for identifying the own game machine and other game machines. Game machine identification information and the like. On the other hand, when the player tries to acquire game information in the middle of the game or when the player tries to acquire game information at the end of the game, in addition to this information, the player starts the game The game information indicating the game contents recorded after the game is included is included.

  The control unit of the portable terminal 400 reads the displayed two-dimensional code with a camera, accesses the game information management server 500 according to the domain or the like included in the two-dimensional code, and when the player starts a game, 2 The log-in number information, gaming machine identification information, etc. included in the dimension code are transmitted as transmission data at the start, while the game information is obtained when the player tries to acquire game information in the middle of the game or when the player ends the game. If the user wants to acquire the information, the login count information, gaming machine identification information, gaming information, and the like included in the two-dimensional code are transmitted as output transmission data.

  On the other hand, when there is an access when the player starts a game, the control unit of the game information management server 500 stores the log-in number information, the gaming machine identification information, and the like included in the received start transmission data. To remember.

  In addition, the control unit of the game information management server 500 is accessed when the player tries to acquire game information in the middle of the game or when the player tries to acquire game information at the end of the game. Determines whether the login count information and gaming machine identification information included in the received output transmission data matches the login count information and gaming machine identification information stored when the player starts the game. In this case, the log-in number information, gaming machine identification information, gaming information, etc. included in the output transmission data are accumulated in a gaming information DB (database) not shown. In addition, the control unit of the game information management server 500 generates display data (for example, a web page) that allows the mobile terminal 400 to display the content indicated by the received game information and the like. Send back. And the control part of the portable terminal 400 displays the screen which shows game content etc. on a display part based on the received display data. The player can confirm the game content and the like from the screen.

  Next, the pachislot machine 1 when the player uses the game information providing service will be described. First, the sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 displays a menu screen in the liquid crystal display area 11a when no game is being played by any player. On the menu screen, an item to be selected (“game recording start” item) is displayed when a player who intends to use the game information providing service starts a game. When a player who wants to start a game selects the item with the selection button 28 and presses the enter button 29, the sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 recognizes that the player starts the game, and the game The two-dimensional code 300 at the start is displayed, and thereafter, the game content recording is started.

  Further, when the sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 detects an operation of simultaneously pressing the selection button 28 and the determination button 29 during non-game, the menu screen is displayed in the liquid crystal display area 11a. The menu screen shows the items to be selected when the player obtains game information indicating the game contents from the start of the game to the time point (“intermediate progress acquisition” item), and after the game is finished and from the start of the game Items to be selected (“game record end” item) to be displayed when the game information indicating the game contents up to are acquired are displayed.

  When the sub CPU 102 of the pachi-slot machine 1 detects an operation of selecting the “middle progress acquisition” item or the “game recording end” item using the selection button 28 and the decision button 29, the game content recorded from the start of the game The transmission information is generated based on the transmission information, and the two-dimensional code 300 based on the transmission information is displayed.

  Next, transmission information will be described with reference to FIG. Transmission information consists of 128 bytes. The transmission information has a general-purpose configuration so that not only the pachislot machine 1 of the model described in this embodiment but also game contents recorded by other types of pachislot machines 1 can be transmitted. Hereinafter, items included in the transmission information will be described.

  In the 1st to 28th bytes of the transmission information, the domain of the game information management server 500 and data indicating a request to the game information management server 500 are set. A case-specific code for identifying a gaming machine is set in the 29th to 39th bytes of the transmission information. The 40th to 61st bytes of the transmission information are reserved areas. The transmission information generation time is set in the 62nd to 67th bytes of the transmission information. In the 68th to 71st bytes of the transmission information, a model code indicating the type of gaming machine is set.

  A type number is set in the 72nd to 73rd bytes of the transmission information. The 72nd byte of the type number is set to “1” when the player starts the game (when the game starts (login)), and when the player tries to acquire game information in the middle of the game ( “2” is set in the middle), and “3” is set when the player tries to acquire game information at the end of the game (when the game ends (logout)). The information set in the 73rd byte of the type number varies depending on the contents of the 72nd byte. That is, when “1” is set in the 72nd byte, the total number of game starts (login) from the power-on of the pachislot machine 1 is set in the 73rd byte, and “2” or “ When “3” is set, the total game start (login) number set at the time of game start (login) is set at the 73rd byte.

  In the 80th to 82nd bytes of the transmission information, the total number of games from the game start (login) to that time is set.

  In the 83rd to 85th bytes of the transmission information, the total number of inserted medals from the game start (login) to that time is set. In the 86th to 88th bytes of the transmission information, the total number of paid-out medals from the start of the game (login) to that time is set.

  In the 89th to 92nd bytes of the transmission information, the BB execution count, RB execution count, and MB execution count from the game start (login) to that time are set. However, since the BB and RB are not adopted in the model described in this embodiment, the area where the BB execution count and the RB execution count are set is blank. The 93rd to 94th bytes of the transmission information are reserved areas. From the 95th byte to the 97th byte of the transmission information, the maximum / minimum MB interval (the number of games from the end of the MB until the next internal winning of the MB) from the start of the game (login) to that point is set. The

  From the 98th byte to the 100th byte of the transmission information, the maximum value of the number acquired by the player during the ART from the start of the game (login) to that time is set as the maximum ART acquisition number. From the 101st byte to the 103rd byte of the transmission information, the maximum value of the number of games in which ART has continued from the start of the game (login) to that time is set as the maximum number of continuous ARTs. From the 104th byte to the 105th byte of the transmission information, the maximum value of the number of continuous games in the AT state is set as the maximum combo number. From the 106th byte to the 107th byte of the transmission information, the number of occurrences of ART from the start of the game (login) to that time is set as the number of ART entry. From the 108th byte to the 124th byte of the transmission information, as a penalty bit, in the game from the start of the game (login) to the time point, the number of times the penalty state has occurred and the game executed in the state where the penalty state has occurred The number of times is set. A checksum is set from the 125th byte to the 127th byte of the transmission information.

  In this way, the sub RAM 103 stores the number of games executed in a state where a penalty state has been generated.

  The content of information set from the 80th byte to the 124th byte of the transmission information is player-provided information provided when the game information management server 500 is accessed from the portable terminal 400 (player). Also, from the 80th byte to the 97th byte, the same information is set in common for all models. From the 98th byte to the 107th byte, model-specific information identified by the model code is set. In addition, the portable terminal 400 that has read the two-dimensional code 300 generated based on the transmission information transmits at least information from the 29th byte to the 124th byte of the transmission information to the game information management server 500.

  With this configuration, the game information providing system S according to the present embodiment stores the number of times that a predetermined disadvantageous condition is established for each player and the number of times that a unit game is executed in the penalty state in the game information management server 500. Therefore, when the player transfers his / her game information from the game information management server 500 to a display device such as a portable terminal of his / her own and browses the game information, he / she knows how much penalty is incurred due to the penalty state, You can deepen your understanding of the game and improve your interest in the game.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the premier role is won internally, the main CPU 93 performs the lottery effect pattern lottery process (step S101 in FIG. 118) and the release counter lottery process (step S101). Step S104 in FIG. 118 is performed, and a privilege grant game is executed (game start effect control process shown in FIG. 120). In this privilege granting game, the main CPU 93 performs a player release operation (input) by pressing the MAXBET button 22b until the wait time set for the determined spinning effect pattern has elapsed (step S149 in FIG. 120). Operation) (step S144 in FIG. 120), and before the wait time elapses, only the determined release counter value is counted (strictly, the release counter value is counted down for each release operation). It is determined whether or not the release operation has been performed (step S146 in FIG. 120). On the other hand, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a release signal transmitted by the main CPU 93 has been received (step S852 shown in FIG. 141), and before the wait time set in advance for each of the spinning effect patterns has elapsed. When the release signal is received, the number of games in the first AT state game is increased, the number of games in the second AT state game is increased, or the number of games in the second AT state game is increased according to the loop rate. A process for shifting the gaming state to one AT state is performed (a process for giving a special privilege is performed).

  Thus, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the notification effect for notifying that the premier role has been won internally, it is possible not only to start the notification effect but also to shorten the notification effect. Since it is the structure which starts a privilege provision game, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention and interest with respect to alerting | reporting effect itself, and it becomes possible to make recognition with respect to alerting | reporting of a premier role more reliable.

  Furthermore, since the notification effect is started and the privilege-giving game is also started, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored during the notification effect as in the past. In particular, in the conventional pachislot machine, when the notification effect is started, there is often a freeze effect in which no game operation is accepted until the notification effect ends. For this reason, it is necessary for the player to interrupt the game until the notification effect ends, and to continue waiting for the notification, and the interest of the game tends to decrease. However, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the bonus granting game is started at the same time as the notification production start, it is possible to further enhance the interest enhanced by the game by the bonus granting game, and the interest and curiosity of the player It becomes possible to attract more hearts.

  Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, lottery of the spinning effect pattern and lottery of the counter value are performed in the privilege granting game, and different notification effects depending on the spinning effect pattern determined by the lottery. And a different notification effect time (10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds or 25 seconds: game time), and the number of presses of the MAXBET button 22b to be pressed before the notification effect ends is different. The number of times of pressing (10, 20, 30, or 40) is set according to the counter value. For this reason, when a privilege grant game is started, the MAXBET button 22b must be pressed a different number of times within a different game time for each privilege grant game, and as a result, different time allocations for each privilege grant game And a different number of release operations. Therefore, each time a privilege-giving game is started, the player needs to perform a certain number of pressing operations within a different notification production time. If it is performed, there is a possibility that the release operation cannot be completed by the end of the notification effect. For this reason, at the start of the privilege granting game or during the release operation (input operation), the time until the end of the notification effect (wait time) and the necessary release based on the display content of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the reel rotation state A strategic way of enjoying the release operation until the end of the notification production (until the wait time elapses) while reliably grasping the number of operations, etc. is also possible, and the player's interest can be further enhanced. .

  In particular, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the release operation is completed earlier than the time (wait time) until the end of the notification effect (more specifically, the determined count number is pressed). Thus, since a special privilege is given to the player, the player eagerly works on the release operation in an attempt to complete the release operation earlier, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  As mentioned above, although it demonstrated in detail using the pachislot machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine which concerns on this invention, the gaming machine which concerns on this invention is not limited to the example described in embodiment mentioned above. For example, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the release operation is completed by the end of the notification effect, the number of first AT state games to be added is determined by lottery (step S856 in FIG. 141), or The second AT state game number to be added is determined by lottery (step S859 in FIG. 141), but the number of games to be added may be determined according to the time when the release operation is completed. . For example, the time required to complete the release operation is subtracted from the time until the notification effect ends (wait time), and the earlier the time of the subtraction result than the wait time (the shorter the shorter), the more It is also possible to make the processing content such that the number of games is added.

  In this way, the earlier the release operation is completed, the more the number of games is added, so that the player is eager to complete the release operation earlier to complete the release operation. It is possible to further enhance the interest of In addition, by experiencing a lot of privilege-giving games, you can learn the tips of the release operation and improve the speed of the release operation, so you can improve your interest and motivation for the release operation. Furthermore, as a result of the increase in the number of games given, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction and challenge.

  Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the MAXBET button 22b is pressed as many times as the determined counter as the release operation. However, the release operation method is not necessarily limited to the press operation of the MAXBET button 22b. . In addition to the MAXBET button 22b, the BET button 22a, the start lever 23, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R, and the like may be operated by the number of counters.

  Further, the release operation is not necessarily limited to the case where the same button or the like is pressed continuously. For example, the release operation can be completed by operating a stop button or the like a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order.

  For example, when the privilege grant game is started, the order of stop buttons to be operated (for example, left-right-right-medium) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the stop button is pressed earlier according to the display. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that completes the release operation. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the completion of the release operation is determined according to the operation order of the stop buttons to be operated, the release operation method becomes diverse and the player's attention to the release operation is required. It can increase the player's interest.

  Furthermore, the release operation method can be changed according to the type of the spinning effect pattern to be determined, the counter value to be determined, etc., so that the degree of difficulty of the release operation can be increased or decreased, and the operation speed of the release operation Can be changed. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the release operation, and it can be avoided that the player feels bored by repeatedly experiencing the notification effect and the privilege granting game.

  Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example of the internal winning combination in which the notification effect and the bonus game are started, the explanation is given using the platinum role. However, the notification effect and the bonus game are started. The internal winning role is not necessarily limited to the platinum role. For example, it may be another small combination, or may be a bonus combination that shifts the game to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Even when such a winning combination is used, the same effect as the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be obtained.

1 Pachislot machine (game machine)
3L, 3C, 3R reel 4 reel display window (design display means)
11 Liquid crystal display devices 19L, 19C, 19R Stop button 22a BET button 22b MAXBET button 23 Start lever 53d Stop switch 77 BET switch (input operation detection means)
79 Start switch (start operation detection means)
80L, 80C, 80R Stop switch (stop operation detection means, input operation detection means)
91 main control circuit 93 main CPU (design variation means, internal winning combination determination means, reel stop control means, winning determination means, game time determination means, operation count determination means, operation order determination means, release operation completion determination means)
94 Main ROM
95 Main RAM
101 Sub control circuit 102 Sub CPU (Release operation completion judging means, effect state transition means)
103 Sub RAM

Claims (5)

Multiple reels with multiple designs,
A symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols respectively arranged on the plurality of reels;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
Design changing means for changing the plurality of symbols by rotating the plurality of reels based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability;
A stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping the rotation of each reel;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reels is stopped to be displayed on the symbol display means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being
A winning determination means for determining whether a winning combination or non-winning is based on a combination of symbols stopped on an active line provided in the symbol display means in accordance with the change of the symbols stopped by the reel stop control means; ,
An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation by the player;
A game time determining means for determining a game time of the privilege granting game when a special role for starting the privilege granting game is determined as an internal winning combination;
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of times of the input operation necessary for ending the privilege-giving game is determined before the game time determined by the game time determination means elapses Means for determining the number of operations to be performed;
The operation in which the number of detections of the input operation in the input operation detection unit is determined by the operation number determination unit from when the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination until the game time elapses. A cancellation operation completion determination means for determining whether the cancellation operation is completed and the privilege granting game is ended by reaching the number of times;
When the release operation completion determining means determines that the release operation has been completed before the game time has elapsed, the effect state is changed to an assist state in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified. Production state transition means for transition, and
The stop operation detecting means is when the game time has elapsed from when the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination, or when the release operation is determined to be completed by the release operation completion determining means. The game machine is characterized in that the stop operation is not detected until whichever time is earlier. Multiple reels with multiple designs,
A symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols respectively arranged on the plurality of reels;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
Design changing means for changing the plurality of symbols by rotating the plurality of reels based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability;
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation for stopping the reel rotated by the symbol changing means based on pressing of a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reels is stopped to be displayed on the symbol display means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being
A winning determination means for determining whether a winning combination or non-winning is based on a combination of symbols stopped on an active line provided in the symbol display means in accordance with the change of the symbols stopped by the reel stop control means; ,
An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the player by the plurality of stop buttons;
A game time determining means for determining a game time of the privilege granting game when a special role for starting the privilege granting game is determined as an internal winning combination;
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the input by the plurality of stop buttons necessary for ending the privilege granting game before the game time determined by the game time determination means elapses An operation order determining means for determining an operation order of the operation from a plurality of operation orders by the plurality of stop buttons;
The operation in which the detection order of the input operations in the input operation detection means is determined by the operation order determination means between the time when the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination and before the game time elapses A release operation completion determination means for determining whether the release operation is completed and the privilege granting game is ended by matching the order;
When the release operation completion determining means determines that the release operation has been completed before the game time has elapsed, the effect state is changed to an assist state in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified. Production state transition means for transition, and
The stop operation detecting means is when the game time has elapsed from when the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination, or when the release operation is determined to be completed by the release operation completion determining means. The game machine is characterized in that the stop operation is not detected until whichever time is earlier. The production state transition means includes
When the release operation completion determination unit determines that the release operation is completed,
Furthermore, the game machine of Claim 1 or Claim 2 which performs the process which increases the frequency | count of the game in which the said assist state is continued is performed. The production state transition means includes
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein a time required for the release operation to be completed is subtracted from the game time, and the number of games to be increased is determined according to the subtraction result. The symbol variation means is
When the start operation is detected and the special combination is detected as the internal winning combination, when the game time elapses from when the special combination is detected, or by the release operation completion determination unit 2. The reel rotation control unit starts a reel rotation operation to stop the variation of the symbol on the basis of the earlier time when it is determined that the release operation is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 4 to 5.

Images